Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL Toledo 6JA012720BG Inglés (11.16)

6JA012720BG (11.16) SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Toledo About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow- TOLEDO, some of the equipment and func- ing page. tions that are described in this manual are not This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips WARNING The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error CAUTION or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board information, which is detailed in the corre- Foreword documentation to the new owner, as it sponding chapters. should be kept with the vehicle. This Instruction Manual and its correspond- ● Alphabetical index with many terms and ing supplements should be read carefully to You can access the information in this man- synonyms to help you find information. familiarise yourself with your vehicle. ual using: WARNING Besides the regular care and maintenance of ● Thematic table of contents that follows the Read and always observe safety informa- the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- manual’s general chapter structure. serve its value. tion concerning the passenger's front air- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics bag ››› page 73, Important information For safety reasons, always note the informa- to indicate the pages containing “essential” regarding the front passenger's airbag. tion concerning accessories, modifications and part replacements.

Table of Contents

Correct position for passengers ...... 56 Communications and multimedia ...... 100 Table of Contents Pedal area ...... 60 Steering wheel controls* ...... 100 Seat belts ...... 61 Multimedia ...... 104 The essentials ...... 5 The whys and wherefores of seat belts ...... 61 Opening and closing ...... 104 Exterior view ...... 5 How to properly adjust your seatbelt ...... 64 Remote control ...... 104 Exterior view ...... 6 Seat belt tensioners ...... 65 Keys ...... 105 Interior view (left-hand drive) ...... 7 Airbag system ...... 66 Central locking system ...... 107 Interior view (right-hand drive) ...... 8 Brief introduction ...... 66 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 112 How it works ...... 9 Airbag safety instructions ...... 69 Rear lid ...... 113 Unlocking and locking ...... 9 Deactivating airbags ...... 71 Opening and closing of electric windows . . . . . 115 Before driving ...... 11 Transporting children safely ...... 72 Lights and visibility ...... 116 Airbags ...... 14 Safety for children ...... 72 Lights ...... 116 Child seats ...... 16 Child seats ...... 74 Interior lights ...... 122 Starting the vehicle ...... 18 Visibility ...... 123 Lights and visibility ...... 18 Emergencies ...... 75 Windscreen wipers and windscreen wash- Easy Connect ...... 21 Self-help ...... 75 ers ...... 124 Driver information system ...... 23 Emergency equipment ...... 75 Mirrors ...... 126 Driving data ...... 26 Changing a wheel ...... 75 Seats and head restraints ...... 127 Cruise control ...... 31 Tyre repairs ...... 76 Adjusting seats and head restraints ...... 127 Warning lamps ...... 32 Towing the vehicle ...... 78 Seat functions ...... 128 Gearbox lever ...... 34 Fuses and bulbs ...... 80 Transport and practical equipment ...... 131 Air conditioning ...... 36 Fuses ...... 80 Practical equipment ...... 131 Fluid Level control ...... 39 Changing bulbs ...... 83 Storing objects ...... 137 Emergencies ...... 43 Changing the fog light bulbs ...... 86 Luggage compartment ...... 138 Fuses ...... 43 Changing the rear lights (on the side panel) . . 87 Roof rack* ...... 141 Bulbs ...... 44 Changing tail lights (on the rear lid) ...... 89 Air conditioning ...... 142 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 44 Changing the bulb on the number plate ...... 91 Heating and air conditioning ...... 142 Changing a wheel ...... 46 Heating and fresh air ...... 144 Snow chains ...... 49 Operation ...... 93 Air conditioning (manual)* ...... 145 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 50 Controls and displays ...... 93 Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . . 147 How to jump start ...... 51 General instrument panel ...... 92 Driving ...... 149 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 53 Instruments and warning lamps ...... 94 Instruments ...... 94 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 149 Safety ...... 55 Control lamps ...... 98 Brakes and brake servo systems ...... 152 Safe driving ...... 55 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 99 Braking and stability systems ...... 154 Safety first! ...... 55 System settings (CAR)* ...... 99 Manual gearbox ...... 156 Advice about driving ...... 55 Automatic gearbox ...... 157 Run-in and economical driving ...... 161

3 Table of Contents

Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- Driving with a trailer ...... 223 tion system ...... 164 Wheels ...... 224 Driving tips ...... 166 Engine data ...... 225 Driver assistance systems ...... 167 Dimensions ...... 231 Parking aid ...... 167 Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* ...... 171 Index ...... 233 cruise speed (Cruise control)* ...... 174 Monitoring system Front Assist* ...... 176 Start-Stop System* ...... 181 Tiredness detection (break recommendation)* ...... 182 Towing bracket device ...... 184 Driving with a trailer ...... 184 Towing bracket device for trailer ...... 186 Advice ...... 192 Care and maintenance ...... 192 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle ...... 192 Care and cleaning ...... 193 Checking and refilling levels ...... 199 Fuel ...... 199 Engine compartment ...... 202 Engine oil ...... 205 Coolant ...... 208 Brake fluid ...... 209 Windscreen washer ...... 210 Battery ...... 211 Wheels and tyres ...... 215 Wheels ...... 215 Spare wheel ...... 218 Tyre monitoring systems ...... 219 Winter service ...... 220 Technical data ...... 221 Technical specifications ...... 221 Important information ...... 221 Information on fuel consumption ...... 222

4 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 39 4 ››› page 9 7 ››› page 39 2 ››› page 50 5 ››› page 44 3 ››› page 11 6 ››› page 10

5 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 40 4 ››› page 41 7 ››› page 41 10 ››› page 137 2 ››› page 40 5 ››› page 40 8 ››› page 75 3 ››› page 43 6 ››› page 41 9 ››› page 45

6 The essentials Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 13 5 ››› page 32 9 ››› page 21 13 ››› page 34 17 ››› page 11 2 ››› page 18 6 ››› page 20 10 ››› page 14 14 ››› page 11 18 ››› page 12 3 ››› page 19 7 ››› page 23 11 ››› page 36 15 ››› page 11 19 ››› page 13 4 ››› page 31 8 ››› page 19 12 ››› page 18 16 ››› page 43

7 The essentials Interior view (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 19 5 ››› page 20 9 ››› page 13 13 ››› page 34 17 ››› page 18 2 ››› page 31 6 ››› page 23 10 ››› page 14 14 ››› page 13 18 ››› page 43 3 ››› page 19 7 ››› page 32 11 ››› page 36 15 ››› page 11 19 ››› page 11 4 ››› page 21 8 ››› page 18 12 ››› page 11 16 ››› page 12

8 The essentials How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the Unlocking and locking the driver's key door Unlocking and locking ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. Doors ● Unlocking the rear lid: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. The warning lamp on the button will light up. None of the doors can be opened from the Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder. outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. If the central locking system should fail to op- ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. The erate, the driver door can still be locked and Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons. warning lamp on the button will switch off. unlocked by turning the key in the lock. ● Unfold the vehicle key shaft. ››› in Unlocking and locking the vehicle  on page 105 ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle from ››› page 104 below ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover  upwards.

››› page 9, ››› page 10 ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder  to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when Fig. 2 Centre console: central locking switch. vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not triggered ›››  page 107. »

9 The essentials

● After the driver door is opened, you have ● Insert the key in the slot B and turn it in 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once the direction of the arrow until horizontal (on  ››› in Rear lid on page 114 this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. the other direction on the right-hand door). ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- ● Replace the cap.  ››› page 113 mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and Once the door has been locked, it can no lon- deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. ››› page 10 ger be opened from the outside. The door  Note can be opened from the inside by pulling the door handle. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key Manual release of the rear lid shaft ›››  page 107. Rear lid

Locking manually

Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to manual release. Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside. The rear lid can be unlocked manually from Fig. 4 Rear door: manual locking ● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release inside in the event of an emergency. lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens ● Insert the key in the opening in the lining On the front of a door with no lock cylinder automatically. of the rear lid and move the key in the direc- there is an emergency locking device that is ● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the tion of the arrow until the lock is released. only visible when the door is open. handles on the interior lining and close it by pushing gently. Locking ● Remove the cap A ››› Fig. 4. 10 The essentials

Bonnet ››› in Operation of the electric windows ››› in Introduction on page 202   on page 115  ››› page 202  ››› page 115

Electric windows* Before driving

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 8 Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows. Fig. 9 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. Fig. 7 Unlocking the bonnet. ● Opening the window: Press the  button. ● Closing the window: Pull the  button. 1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move ● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under the seat forwards or backwards. the dashboard Fig. 7 1 . ››› Buttons on the driver door 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. ● Lifting up the bonnet: press the release 1 Window on the front left door 3 Tilting the backrest: pull the lever back. catch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 7 2 . 2 Window on the front right door The arrester hook under the bonnet is released. 3 Window on the rear left door  ››› in Introduction on page 127 ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the 4 Window on the rear right door bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric signed for this in the bonnet. window buttons in the rear doors. 11 The essentials

Adjusting the head restraints Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side. Fig. 10 Front seat: adjustment of the head restraint. To adjust the seat belt around your should- ers, adjust the height of the seats. Grab the sides of the head restraints with The shoulder part of the seat belt should be both hands and push upwards to the desired well centred over it, never over the neck. The position. To lower it, repeat the same action, seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pressing the 1 button on the side. upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the ››› in head restraints on page 128  pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat Fig. 11 Positioning and removing the seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- belt buckle.  ››› page 59, ››› page 128 vis.

 ››› page 62  ››› page 64

12 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po- right) to the direction desired.  sition on page 57 During a collision, the seat belts on the front  Depending on the equipment fitted on seats are retracted automatically. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated The tensioner can be triggered only once. according to the outside temperature.

››› in Service and disposal of belt ten- ››› in Exterior mirrors on page 126  sioners on page 66   ››› page 65  ››› page 126

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: control for Fig. 14 Lever in the lower left side of the the exterior mirror. steering column.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: to the corresponding position: Pull the ››› Fig. 14 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- the lever back up until it locks. tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver

13 The essentials

Airbags In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front Front airbags passenger additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

 ››› in Front airbags on page 69

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag

Fig. 16 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags are triggered.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 15  and the front passenger airbag is located in the dash pan- Fig. 15 Driver airbag in the steering wheel el ››› Fig. 15 . Airbags are identified by the and front passenger airbag in the dash panel word “AIRBAG”. When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to Fig. 17 Front passenger front airbag switch. the steering wheel and dashboard, respectively ››› Fig. 16. 14 The essentials

To deactivate the front passenger front air- Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side bag: airbag system provides additional protection ● Open the glove compartment on the front for the upper body in the event of a severe passenger side. side collision ›››  page 61, The whys and wherefores of seat belts. ● Insert the key blade into the slot provided in the deactivation switch. In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key of the body facing the impact. In addition to blade remains inserted (the maximum). the normal protection from the front seat ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to belts, passengers are also held fast in the . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en- event of a side collision, and this is how sure that you have inserted the key as far as these airbags provide maximum protection. it will go. Fig. 18 Side airbag in driver's seat. ● Finally, check the control lamp on the in- ››› in Side airbags* on page 69 strument panel where it shows       the following should appear .

››› in Front passenger front airbag  switch on page 72  ››› page 71

Fig. 19 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests ››› Fig. 18. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

15 The essentials

Head-protection airbags* and upper body in the event of a severe side collision ››› page 15.

 ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 70

Child seats

Important information regarding the Fig. 23 On the rear frame of the passenger front passenger's airbag side door: airbag sticker. Fig. 20 Location of head-protection airbags. A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.

››› in Important information regarding  the front passenger's airbag on page 73  ››› page 73

Fig. 22 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag Fig. 21 Deployed head-protection airbags. sticker. Possible ways to secure child seats The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or ››› Fig. 20 and are identified with the text front passenger seat in the following ways: “AIRBAG”. ● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- with a seat belt. protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head

16 The essentials

● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be The systems include the child restraint sys- fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO- tem mounting with an upper retaining strap FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO- (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings the seat. ››› page 17. ››› in Safety instructions on page 74 Seat locations  Weight group Front pas- Rear Rear sengera) outer centre “ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat Fig. 25 Top Tether* securing ring. Group 0 U* U/L U mounting system* <10 kg Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* Group 0+ U* U/L U system can be secured quickly, easily and <13 kg safely on the rear outer seats. Group I U* U/L U When removing or fitting the child seat, 9-18 kg please be sure to follow the manufacturer's Group II/III U* U U instructions. 15-36 kg ● Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manu- will go. facturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- Fig. 24 ISOFIX securing rings. taining rings until the child seat can be heard U: Suitable for universal approved restrain- to engage. If the child seat is equipped with ing systems for use in this age category Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the (universal retention systems are those correspondent ring. Observe the manufactur- fitted using the adult seat belt). er's instructions. *: Move the front passenger seat as far ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- back as possible, as high as possible sure that it is secure. and always disable the airbag. L: Suitable for retention systems using the Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* anchors. each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. Access to » 17 The essentials

the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat Locking and unlocking the steering wheel ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top ● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not Tether* rings are located at the rear of the the key from the ignition and turn the wheel press the accelerator. backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic backrest or in the boot). gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- Start-Stop System* Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, When you stop and release the clutch pedal, attachment system are available from Techni- press the locking key on the selector lever the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. cal Services. and release it again. The ignition remains switched on. ● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key ››› in Safety instructions on page 74 into the ignition and turn it at the same time ››› in Introduction on page 149  as the steering wheel in the direction indica-  ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steering wheel, it may be because it is  ››› page 149 locked. Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Ignition lock plugs reheating Lights and visibility ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 position. Light switch ● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1 position. ● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine ● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- Fig. 26 Ignition key positions. to neutral. Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal Fig. 27 Dash panel: light control. tion and start the engine. and move the selector lever to the P position or into N.

18 The essentials

Turn the switch to the required position Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights ››› Fig. 27.

Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is switch- bol ed off ed on

Fog lights, dipped Light off or daytime beam and side  driving light on. lights off.

The “Coming home” and “Leaving Automatic control of  home” guide lights dipped beam and day- may be switched time running light. on. Fig. 28 Turn signal and main beam lever Fig. 29 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights.  Side light on. More the lever to the required position: Switched on, for example: Dipped beam head- Dipped beam switch-  1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking light off ed on. ● light (ignition switched off). When approaching a traffic jam ● In an emergency  Front fog lights: move the switch to the 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light first position, from positions ,  or . (ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down  Rear fog light: move the switch completely 3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  ● When towing or being towed from positions ,  or . lit up on the instrument panel. Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or 4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is ››› page 121   turn it to the  position. pushed. Control lamp lit up. Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› in Introduction on page 116  ››› page 118  ››› page 116

19 The essentials

Interior lights Knob Function More the lever to the required position:

Switches door contact control on (central po- 0  Windscreen wiper off. sition). The interior lights come on automatically Windscreen wipers interval wipe. when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is Using the control ››› Fig. 32 A adjust the 1   opened or the key is removed from the igni- interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or tion. the sensitivity of the rain sensor. The lights go off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the 2  Slow wipe. ignition is switched on. 3  Continuous wipe.  Turning the reading light on and off Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold 4  the lever down for more time to increase Fig. 30 Detail of headliner: version 1 the wipe frequency.  ››› page 122 Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the lever 5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind- Windscreen wipers and window wiper screen wipers start. blade Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper 6  will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

The rear window wash function is activa- 7  ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously. Fig. 31 Detail of headliner: version 2

››› in Introduction on page 124 Knob Function   Switches interior lights off.  ››› page 124  Switches interior lights on. Fig. 32 Operating the windscreen wiper and ››› page 53 rear wiper 

20 The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 33 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 34 Easy Connect: CAR menu

To select the settings menus, press the Easy ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it When you press the menu button, the last se- Connect  button and the Setup function on. lected menu will always be displayed. button. ● Press the system's MENU button and then When the function button check box is activa- The actual number of menus available and the system's  ››› Fig. 33 button or  but- ted , the function is active. the name of the various options in these me- ton to go to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 34. Any changes made using the settings menus nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics ● Press the function button Setup to open the are automatically saved on closing the and equipment. menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 34. BACK menus. ● Switch the ignition on. ● To select a function in the menu, press the desired button.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 154

Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 219 Tyres Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 220 »

21 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Front Assist (ambient traffic Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 176 monitoring system)

Driver assistance City emergency braking func- Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 180 tion

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 182

Parking and ma- Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings, ParkPilot ››› page 167 noeuvring adjust volume

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 122

Coming home/Leaving home Vehicle lights Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function ››› page 121 function

Daytime driving light Activation/deactivation ››› page 118

Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking Mirrors/wind‐ ››› page 126 screen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 124

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function Opening and clos- ››› page 104 ing Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 107

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers, Multifunction ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed- – ››› page 23 display ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data “total calculation”

Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for- Date and time – – mat, set the date, date format

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 30

All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir- Factory settings – – rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display

22 The essentials

lever button or the multifunction steering Operating the instrument panel me-  ››› in CAR menu (Setup) on page 99 wheel button. nus The information system also provides the fol-  ››› page 99 lowing information and displays (depending on the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data ››› page 26 Driver information system ■ Vehicle status ■ MFD from departure Introduction ■ MFD from refuelling ■ MFD total calculation With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display Assist systems ››› table on page 24 Fig. 35 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- by scrolling through the menus. ■ Reverse (optional) tons. In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system the multifunction display can only be operated with the steering wheel buttons. Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga- tion system The number of menus displayed on the instrument panel will vary according to the ve- Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book- hicle electronics and equipment. let Navigation system A specialised workshop will be able to pro- Vehicle ››› table on page 24 gramme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- WARNING ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Some menu options can only be read when Fig. 36 Right side of multifunction steering the vehicle is at a standstill. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- wheel: control buttons. trols when driving. As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it The driver information system is controlled will not be possible to read the menus. Some with the multifunction steering wheel buttons warning messages can be confirmed and Fig. 36 or with the windscreen wiper lever made to disappear with the windscreen wiper ››› ››› Fig. 35 (if the vehicle is not equipped with multifunction steering wheel). » 23 The essentials

Enabling the main menu Making changes according to the menu Menu Function ● Switch the ignition on. ● With the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi- Station display on the radio. ● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, Track name on the CD. Audio press button ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen function steering wheel, make the desired Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra- wiper lever or button  on the multifunction changes. To increase or decrease the values dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system. steering wheel . more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. ››› Fig. 36 Information and possible configurations ● ● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- Mark or confirm the selection with button Tele- of the mobile phone preinstallation er: to display the main screen ››› page 24 or ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen wiper lever phone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation to return to the main menu from another or button  on the multifunction steering system. wheel ››› Fig. 36. menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 35 In a racing circuit, measurement and 2 . Lap tim- memorisation of lap times by the vehicle ● If managed from the multifunction steering er* and comparison with previously measured best times ››› page 28. wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. Menu To go from point to point in the main menu, Display of the current warning or informa- press button   or   several times Menu Function Vehicle tion texts and other system components, ››› Fig. 36. status depending on the equipment Information and possible configurations Driving ››› page 99. of the multifunction display (MFD) data Select a submenu ››› page 26, ››› page 99.

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 on the Information and possible configurations Assist Outside temperature display windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn of the driver assistance systems systems the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering ››› page 99. wheel ››› Fig. 36 until the desired option ap- When the outside temperature is below +4°C pears marked on the menu. Information instructions from the activa- (+39°F), the symbol “ice crystal” (warning of ted navigation system: when a route guid- risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this ● The selected option is displayed between ance is activated, the turning arrows and symbol flashes and then it remains lit until two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is proximity bars are displayed. The appear- the outside temperature rises above +6°C displayed on the right:  Naviga- ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys- tion tem. (+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display on ● To consult the submenu option, press but- If route guidance is not activated, the di- page 96. ton ››› Fig. 35 1 on the windscreen wiper rection of travel (compass) and the name lever or button  on the multifunction steer- of the street along which you are driving When the vehicle is at a standstill or when ing wheel ››› Fig. 36. are shown ››› Booklet Navigation system. travelling at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be higher than the true

24 The essentials outside temperature as a result of the heat ●  Change to a higher gear: the suggested Bonnet, rear lid and doors open produced by the engine. gear appears to the right of the current gear when a higher gear is recommended. The temperatures measured range from -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). ●  Change to a lower gear: the suggested gear appears to the left of the current gear when a lower gear is recommended.

Gear-change indicator The gear recommendation may occasionally skip a gear (2nd  4th).

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox* The display is only visible in tiptronic mode ›››  page 159. The following display symbols mean:

●  Shifting up a gear ●  Shifting down a gear

Fig. 37 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- CAUTION tor (manual gearbox). The gear-change indicator is intended to help save fuel, but it is not intended to recom- A gear change will be recommended if the mend the right gear for all driving situations. Fig. 38 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: gear you are in is not the most economical In certain situations, only the driver can front left door open; D: rear right door open choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it choose the correct gear (for instance when (5-door vehicles only). means that you are already in the most eco- overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or towing a trailer). nomical gear. When the ignition is switched on or when driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are Vehicles with a manual gearbox Note open will be indicated on the instrument pan- The following display symbols ››› Fig. 37 The display disappears from the instrument el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- mean: panel when you press the clutch pedal. dicated audibly. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted. »

25 The essentials

Illustra- Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) Driving data Key to ››› Fig. 38 tion Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible Memory  Do not continue driving! warnings. A The bonnet is open or is not properly A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct closed ››› page 202. levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn- The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- ing and control lamps on page 99 ent values for the journey and the consump-  Do not continue driving! Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- tion. B The rear lid is open or is not properly sary, request assistance from specialised personnel. closed ››› page 10. Changing between display modes on the  Do not continue driving! Informative text MFD C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly ● In vehicles without multifunction steering closed ››› page 107. Information relating to different vehicle processes. wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 35. ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering Warning and information messages Submenu Assist systems wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 36. The system runs a check on certain compo- Assist nents and functions when the ignition is systems Function Multifunction display memory switched on and while the vehicle is moving. menu The multifunction display is equipped with Faults in the operation are displayed on the three memories that work automatically: MFD screen using red and yellow symbols and Front As- Switching the monitoring system on from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD sist and off ››› page 176. messages on the instrument panel display total calculation. On the screen display, you (››› page 32, ››› page 32) and, in some ca- Switching the fatigue detection on or can read which memory is currently dis- Fatigue off (pause recommendation) ses, with audible warnings. The display may detection* played. vary according to the type of instrument pan- ››› page 182. el fitted. ● Toggle between memories with the ignition on and the memory displayed: Press the Priority 1 warning (red symbols)  button on the windscreen wiper lever or the  button of the multifunction steering Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible wheel. warnings.  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning and control lamps on page 98 ! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel. 26 The essentials

Menu Function Personalising the displays Menu Function In the Easy Connect system you can adjust Display and storage of the values for This indicates the hours (h) and mi- which of the possible displays of the MFD can Travelling the journey and the consumption from nutes (min) since the ignition was time when the ignition is switched on to be shown on the instrument panel display switched on. when it is switched off. with the button  and the function button If the journey is continued in less than Setup ›››  page 99. Distance Distance covered in km (m) after MFD from 2 hours after the ignition is switched covered switching on the ignition. departure off, the new data is added to the data already stored in the memory. The The average speed will be shown af- memory will automatically be deleted if Data summary ter a distance of about 100 metres the journey is interrupted for more than Average has been travelled. Otherwise hori- 2 hours. speed zontal lines are displayed. The value Menu Function shown is updated approximately ev- Display and storage of the values for ery 5 seconds. MFD from the journey and the consumption. By The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the jour- Digital dis- refuelling refuelling, the memory will be erased Current fuel Current speed displayed in digital ney, in litres/100 km; and with the play of automatically. consumption format. engine running and the vehicle speed The memory records the values for a stopped, in litres/hour. specific number of partial trips, up to a Speed warn- If the stored speed is exceeded (be- total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 After turning on the ignition, aver- ing at --- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - MFD total hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or age fuel consumption in li- km/h or Speed 155 mph), an audible warning is calcula- 9999 km, depending on the model of tres/100 km will be displayed after warning at given together with a visual warn- travelling about 100 metres. Other- --- mph ing. tion instrument panel. On reaching either of Average fuel these limitsa), the memory is automati- wise horizontal lines are displayed. consumption Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature dig- cally erased and starts to count from 0 The value shown is updated approxi- ture ital display again. mately every 5 seconds. ® ACT *: Depending on the equip- Coolant tem- a) Digital display of the current temper- It varies according to the instrument panel version. ment, number of active cylinders. perature ature of the liquid coolant. Approximate distance in km that can gauge Erasing a memory manually still be travelled with the fuel re- ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. Operating maining in the tank, assuming the Storing a speed with the speed warning range same style of driving is maintained. ●  Hold the button of the multifunction This is calculated using the current ● Select the display Speed warning at steering wheel or the  button of the multi- fuel consumption. --- km/h (--- mph) » function wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.

27 The essentials

● Press the button  on the windscreen temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc- 120°C (250°F). If the engine is required to disappear automatically. tion steering wheel to store the current speed work hard and the outside temperature is If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately and activate the warning. high, the engine oil temperature can in- after it appears, press any button on the crease. This does not present any problem as ● To switch system on: adjust to the desired windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- long as the warning lamps  ››› table on speed within 5 seconds using the rocker ing wheel*. switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or page 33 or  ››› table on page 33 do not appear on the display. by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- Note tion steering wheel. Next, press the button ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-  or  again or wait several seconds. ter you switch the ignition on again. The speed is stored and the warning activa- Additional electrical appliances ted. ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- ● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: tions, but rather with a large separation of ● To switch system off: press the but- Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 until the time. ton  or  . The stored speed is de- main menu appears. Enter into the section leted. Driving data. With the rocker switch, move to the display Convenience con- Timer* sumers. Engine oil temperature display ● Operation with the multi-function steering You can access the timer via the selection menu ››› page 24. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to wheel Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the It allows you to manually time lap times on a thumbwheel to the right until the Conven- racing circuit, memorise them and compare ● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 35 2 until ience consumers display appears. them to the vehicle's previous best times. the main menu appears. Enter into Driving data. With the button 2 move to the oil In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- The following menus can be displayed: temperature gauge. rent sum of all the additional appliances. ● Stop Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel ● Lap ● Enter the submenu Driving data and Saving tips ● Pause turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- ● Partial time ture display appears. Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in conditions that increase fuel consumption. ● Statistics The engine reaches its operating temperature Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- when in normal driving conditions, the oil cations appear automatically only with the ef- 28 The essentials

Change from one menu to another Menu “Pause” Menu “Long-term Statistics” ● Vehicles without multifunction steering Continue The interrupted timer continues. View of the latest lap times: wheel: press the rocker switch  in the – total time windscreen wiper lever. A new timer starts. The halted lap ends New lap – best lap time ● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: and is included in the statistics. – worst lap time – average lap duration press  or  . The timer of the current lap ends and is Interr. A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a cancelled. It is not included in the statis- lap total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes Menu “Stop” tics. and 59 seconds. If one of the 2 limits is reached, you will The current timer ends. The lap is inclu- The timer starts. End have to reset the statistics in order to be- ded in the statistics. If there are existing laps and they are in- gin a new timer. cluded in the statistics, it will begin with Start the number of laps in question. Menu “Partial time” Back This returns to the previous menu. It is only possible to begin with a new first lap if the statistics have been reset first in Reset- Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis- All the memorised statistical data are re- the Statistics menu. ting to time played. The timer continues in parallel. set. zero The timer begins when the vehicle sets The timer of the current lap stops and a Since off. new lap starts immediately. The time for New lap WARNING start If the vehicle is already moving, the timer the lap you have just completed is inclu- begins once the vehicle has stopped. ded in the statistics. Do your best to avoid handling the timer while driving. Statis- The Statistics menu is displayed on The current lap timer will be interrupted. tics the screen. Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu is ● Only set the timer or consult statistics displayed. when the vehicle is stationary. Menu “Lap” ● While driving, do not handle the timer in complicated driving situations. The timer of the current lap stops and a new lap starts immediately. The time for New lap the lap you have just completed is included in the statistics. Speed warning device

Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis- The speed warning device warns the driver time played. The timer continues in parallel. when they have exceeded the pre-set speed The current lap timer will be interrupted. limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu is signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and » displayed. 29 The essentials

the driver message Speed limit excee- ● The speed limit warning function in the ver- until 500 km after the last service. Prior to ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the sion for some countries warns you at a speed this, only lines are visible on the display. instrument panel. The warning lamp  of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set switches off when reducing speed below the speed limit. Inspection reminder stored maximum limit. When the Service date is approaching, when Speed warning programming is recommen- the ignition is switched on a Service remind- ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- Service intervals er is displayed. mum speed, such as when travelling in a Vehicles without text messages: a span- country with different speed limits or for a The service interval indication appears on the ner  will be displayed on the instrument maximum speed for winter tyres. instrument panel display ›››  Fig. 110 3 . panel plus an indication in km. SEAT distinguishes between services with en- The kilometres indicated are the maximum Setting speed limit warning gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and number of kilometres that can be travelled You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to services without engine oil change (e.g. In- until the next service. After a few seconds, set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning. spection). the display mode changes. A clock symbol ● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP In vehicles with Services established by time appears and the number of days until the > control button  Driver Assistant > or mileage, the service intervals are already next service is due. pre-defined. Speed warning. Vehicles with text messages: Service in ● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but- In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- --- km or --- days will be shown on the ton Systems or else Vehicle systems > vals are determined individually. Thanks to instrument panel display. Driver assistant > Speed warning. technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the Service due The warning limit can be set from 30 to technology used by SEAT, with this service When the service date is due, an audible 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment you only need to change the oil when the ve- warning is given when the ignition is switch- is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals. hicle so requires. To calculate this change ed on and the spanner displayed on the (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of screen flashes for a few seconds . Note use and individual driving styles are consid- ● Please bear in mind that, even with the ered. The advance warning first appears 20 Vehicles with text messages: Service now speed warning function, it is still important days before the date established for the cor- will be shown on the instrument panel dis- to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the responding service. The kilometres (miles) play. speedometer and to observe the legal speed remaining until the next service are always limits. rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed 30 The essentials

Reading a service notification OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper ● Switching on the CCS: Move switch  With the ignition switched on, the engine off lever, or OK on the multifunction steering ››› Fig. 39 1 to . The system is on. If no and the vehicle at a standstill, the current wheel. speed has been programmed, the system will service notification can be read: ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in not control it. which the battery has been disconnected for ● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 39 Press and hold the button 4 for more than 5 a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- 2 in the  area. The current speed is seconds to consult the service message. culate the date of the next service. Therefore memorised and controlled. the service interval display may not be cor- When the service date has passed, a minus ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- switch ››› Fig. 39 1 to  or push the ometres or days. service intervals permitted in the ››› Book- let Maintenance Programme. brake. The cruise control system is switched Vehicles with text messages: Service off temporarily. since --- km or --- days ago will be ● Reactivating the CCS: Press button shown on the display. ››› Fig. 39 2 in . The memorised speed Cruise control The time can also be set via the  key and is saved and controlled again. Setup function button in the Easy Connect ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula- system ›››  page 99. Operating the cruise control system tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac- (CCS)* celerates until the new stored speed. Resetting service interval display ● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- If the service was not carried out by a SEAT tion: press button 2 in  to lower the dealership, the display can be reset as fol- speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced lows: until reaching the new stored speed. ● Switching off the CCS: Move switch ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ››› Fig. 39 1 to . The system is disconnec- ton ›››  Fig. 110 4 . ted and the memorised speed is deleted. ● Switch ignition back on. ● Release the 4 ›››  Fig. 110 button and ››› in Introduction on page 174 press it again for the next 20 seconds.  Fig. 39 On the left of the steering column: ››› page 174 Note switches and controls for operating the CCS  ● The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when

31 The essentials

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 40 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Red warning lamps Lit up or flashing: Yellow warning lamps ››› page  Do not continue driving! Central warning lamp: additional  150 Central warning lamp: additional Fault in the steering.  information on the instrument pan- –  information on the instrument pan- – el display Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page el display  tened seat belt. 61 Parking brake on.  ››› page 154  Use the foot brake!  Do not continue driving! ››› page The brake fluid level is too low or  153 there is a fault in the brake system. 32 The essentials

 Front brake pads worn. Other warning lamps On the instrument panel display ››› page it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- Left or right turn signal. connection caused by the system. 19  ››› page  ››› page flashes: ESC or ASR activated. 154 Hazard warning lights on. 121 ASR manually deactivated.  ››› page Trailer turn signals  184  ABS faulty or does not work. it lights up: Press the foot brake! ››› page ››› page Rear fog light switched on. flashes: the selector lever locking  18  157 button has not engaged. lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page it lights up: cruise control activated  emission control system. 164 or speed limiter switched on and ››› page it lights up: pre-heating of diesel  active. engine. 31  ››› page flashes: the speed set by the flashes: fault in the diesel engine 165 speed limiter has been exceeded. management. ››› page Fig. 41 On the instrument panel display: door  Main beam on or flasher on. open. fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page 19  ment. 165  Do not continue driving!  lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page With the corresponding indica- ››› page steering system. 150  tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet 25 open or not properly closed. Tyre pressure too low, or fault in ››› page the tyre pressure monitoring sys-   219 Ignition: Do not carry on driv- tem. ing! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high ››› page ››› page   Fuel tank almost empty. 208 98 Flashing: Fault in the engine coolant system.  Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page belt tensioners. 66  Do not continue driving! ››› page  Engine oil pressure too low. 205 »

33 The essentials

››› page Start-Stop system activated. Fault in the battery.  ››› page Gearbox lever  212 181 . Start-Stop system unavailable. Driving light totally or partially ››› page Manual gearbox faulty. 83 ››› page Low consumption driving status   24 Fault in the cornering light sys- ››› page tem. 116

››› page Diesel particulate filter blocked On the instrument panel  164

Level of windscreen washer fluid ››› page Front passenger front airbag is  ››› page too low. 210  disabled (    66  ). Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-  tection. Control manually. ››› page 205 ››› in Warning and control lamps on Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.  page 98 Fig. 42 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox ››› page Fault in the gearbox.  160 ››› page 98  The position of the gears is indicated on the ››› page gearbox lever ››› Fig. 42. Immobiliser active.  150 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot ››› page Service interval display right down.  30 ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po- Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book- sition. via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio  ● phone device. or Release the clutch. ››› Book- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi- Selecting reverse gear  meter. Available only for devices gation ● pre-installed in factory. system Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Freezing warning. The outside ››› page ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it temperature is lower than +4°C  24 (+39°F). upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 42 R . 34 The essentials

● Release the clutch. N Neutral (idling) If there is a fault in the power system to the D Drive (forward) electronic selector lever lock system (flat battery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty, ››› in Changing gears on page 157  S Sport programme: drive (forward) the selector lever cannot be moved from po- +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards sition P in the normal manner, which pre-  ››› page 156 (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to vents the vehicle from being moved. The se- go down a gear. lector lever must be unlocked using the manual release.

Automatic gearbox*  ››› in Basic information on page 157 ● Apply the handbrake. ● Pull gently on both sides at the front of the  ››› page 157 selector lever cover. ● Also loosen the cover at the rear.  ››› page 35 ● Press the yellow plastic part with your finger in the direction indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 44. Manual release of selector lever ● Press the interlock button on the selector lever knob at the same time and move the selector lever to position N (if the selector lever is moved back to position P, it will lock Fig. 43 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- again). sitions.

P Parking lock R Reverse gear

Fig. 44 Manual release of the selector lever.

35 The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 45 In the centre console: Climatronic controls

Buttons/controls 8 Cooling on/off 16 Air distribution to footwells 1 Interior temperature setting 9 Selected blower speed 17 Air recirculation 18 Cooling on/off Display Buttons/controls 2 Selected interior temperature 10 Set blower speed ››› in General notes on page 142 3 Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit 11 Interior temperature sensor  4 Automatic air conditioning mode 12 Defrost or demist windscreen ››› page 147 5 Defrost or demist windscreen 13 Automatic mode  6 Air flow direction 14 Air distribution to windows 7 Air recirculation 15 Air distribution to upper body

36 The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* work?

A Temperature 2 A/C: Switching the cooling system on B Blower C Air distribution  – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.  – Air distribution to upper body.  – Air distribution to footwell  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell. Fig. 46 In the centre console: Manual air con- 1 Air recirculation ditioning controls

Control position Button Basic positions Air vents 4 A B C 1 2

Windscreen and side window de- Switched on automati- Open and direct towards the Full right 3 or 4 Switched off frost or demist  callya) side window

Required tempera- Mild heating 2 or 3 Do not switch on Do not switch on Opening ture / 

Anti-clockwise as far Briefly 4, then 2 It is switched on au- Cool as quickly as possible Switched on Opening as it will go or 3  tomaticallyb)

Required tempera- Open and direct towards the Optimum cooling 1 or 2 Do not switch on Switched on ture  roof

Anti-clockwise as far Fresh air mode - blower Required position Do not switch on Switched off Opening as it will go  a) The lamp in button 2 lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met ›››  page 145, General notes. b) In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically ›››  page 146, a lamp illuminates in the  button. » 37 The essentials

 ››› in General notes on page 142  ››› page 145

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

A Temperature B Blower C Air distribution  – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.  – Air distribution to upper body.  – Air distribution to footwell  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell. Fig. 47 In the centre console: heating system 1 Air recirculation and fresh air controls.

Control position Basic positions Button 1 Air vents 4 A B C

Windscreen and side window de- Open and direct towards the Full right 3 or 4 Switched off frost or demist  side window

Mild heating Required temperature 2 or 3 /  Do not switch on Opening

Anti-clockwise as far as it Fresh air mode - blower Required position Do not switch on Opening will go 

38 The essentials

Fuel ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. ››› in General notes on page 142  ● Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank flap ››› Fig. 48 B.  ››› page 144 Closing the fuel tank cap ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Fluid Level control ● Close the lid. Filling capacities  ››› in Refuelling on page 200 Capacities ››› page 199 55 litres, of which 7 litres act  Fuel tank as reserve.

Windscreen washer fluid container in version 3.5 litres without headlight washer

Windscreen washer fluid container in versions 5.4 litres with headlight washer Fig. 48 Vehicle as seen from the rear right: fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank unscrewed cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central locking.

Opening the fuel tank cap ● Press the fuel tank flap in the direction of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 48 A and open it in the direction of the arrow 2 . 39 The essentials

Oil ● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level Engine oil additives in that zone. No type of additive should be mixed with the ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty. Topping up engine oil

● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening ››› page 205 ››› Fig. 50.  ● Add oil slowly. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure Coolant you do not add too much. ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , Fig. 49 Engine oil dipstick. unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Oil properties

Engine type Specification

Petrol without flexible serv- VW 502 00/VW 504 00 ice interval

Petrol with flexible service VW 504 00 interval (LongLife) Fig. 51 Engine compartment: coolant expan- Diesel. Engines without Par- VW 505 01/VW 506 sion tank cap. ticulate filter (DPF) 01/VW 507 00 Fig. 50 In the engine compartment: Engine Diesel. Particulate Filter En- VW 507 00 The coolant tank is located in the engine oil filler cap gines (DPF). compartment ›››  page 205. With or without flexible The level is measured using the dipstick loca- service interval (with and When the engine is cold, replace the coolant ted in the engine compartment without LongLife)a) when the level is below . ›››  page 205. a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the Coolant specifications The oil should leave a mark between zones engine. A and C . It should never exceed zone A . The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of ● Zone A : Do not add oil. 40 The essentials water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 Brake fluid Windscreen washer (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is Fig. 52 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: wind- necessary, the proportion of additive may be ervoir cap screen washer reservoir top. increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in worsen cooling. gine compartment ›››  page 205. the engine compartment ›››  page 205. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom- of distilled water and at least 40 % of the marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- mended by SEAT. G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive cal Service. (both are purple) to obtain optimal anti-corro- In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze. sion protection. The mixture of G13 with G12 ››› in Checking brake fluid level on plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-  page 210 ››› page 210 blue) engine coolants will significantly re-  duce anti-corrosion protection and should ››› page 209 therefore be avoided.  Battery ››› in Topping up the coolant level on  page 209 The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 205. It does not require  ››› page 208 maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service. »

41 The essentials

 ››› in Introduction on page 211  ››› page 211

42 The essentials

Underneath the instrument panel Emergencies ››› in Introduction on page 80 ● Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi-  cated by the arrow and remove it ››› Fig. 54. Fuses ››› page 80 ● After changing the fuse, replace the cover  Fuse location on the dash panel in the direction opposite that is indicated by the arrow so that the cover tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel. Replacing a blown fuse Subsequently, press down on the cover to close.

In the engine compartment Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 55.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours Fig. 54 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse box cover Colour Amp rating

Black 1 Fig. 56 Image of a blown fuse

Purple 3 Preparation Light brown 5 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment. Brown 7.5 ● Open the corresponding fuse box Red 10 ›››  page 81. Blue 15 Identifying a blown fuse Yellow 20 A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: fuse box White or transparent 25 ››› Fig. 56. cover Green 30 Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown. »

Orange 40 43 The essentials

To replace a fuse Front fog light Type ● Apply the handbrake. ● Remove the fuse. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. Fog/cornering lights* H8 ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an ● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear. identical amperage rating (same colour and Rear bulb light Type ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever markings) and identical size. to position P. ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse Brake light/tail light P21/5W ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from box lid. P21/5W (side panel) your vehicle. Side lights R5W (rear lid) ● Have the vehicle tool kit* ›››  page 75 Turn signal PY21W and the spare wheel ›››  page 218 ready. Bulbs ● Observe the applicable legislation for each Retro fog light P21W country (reflective vest, warning triangles, Bulbs (12 V) Reverse lights P21W etc.). ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Full-LED headlights are designed to last the LED rear lights Type wait in a safe place (for instance behind the lifetime of the car and cannot be replaced. If roadside crash barrier). the headlight becomes damaged, go to a Turn signal PY21W specialised workshop. Retro fog light P21W WARNING Below, the light source used for all functions ● Reverse lights P21W Always observe the above steps and pro- is broken down. tect yourself and other road users. The remaining functions work with LEDs ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block Halogen headlights Type the wheel on the opposite side of the car with Daytime running light/side a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from P21W SLL moving. light Action in the event of a punc- Dipped beam headlights H7 LL ture Main beam headlights H7 LL What to do first Turn signal PY21W ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface Full-LED main headlights Type and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs 44 The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the ture kit ››› Fig. 57 3 and screw the open end of the valve. tube into the tyre valve. ● Repeat the inflation process. ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop bottle. and request assistance from an authorised ● Remove the bottle from the valve. technician. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew ing the tool ››› Fig. 57 1 . the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and Inflating the tyre 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube 80 km/h (50 mph). ››› Fig. 57 5 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ›››  page 78. Fig. 57 Standard representation: contents of ››› Fig. 57 7 . the anti-puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running. ››› in TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobi-  lity System)* on page 77 ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 57 9 into the The anti-puncture kit is located under the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 134. floor panel in the luggage compartment.  ››› page 76 ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF Sealing the tyre switch ››› Fig. 57 8 . ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar the ››› Fig. 57 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Disconnect the air compressor. ››› Fig. 57 10 . ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 57 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.

45 The essentials

Changing a wheel 8 Spare set of bulbs Fitting Before stowing the jack again, screw down ● Press the wheel trim onto the wheel at the Vehicle tool kit* the arm as far as it will go. cut out designed for the valve. ● Press the wheel trim on both sides in the direction of the valve so that it fits correctly ››› in What to do first on page 44  in place around all the perimeter.  ››› page 75 CAUTION ● Press down by hand, do not hit the wheel trim! Knocking it sharply, particularly at points where the wheel trim has not yet been Wheel cover inserted, could result in damage to the wheel trim guiding and centring elements. ● Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel attached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, make Fig. 58 Vehicle tool kit. sure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area ››› page 47, Anti-theft wheel bolts*. The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored in ● Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensure a box on the spare wheel or in the spare enough air inflow is guaranteed in order to wheel well. There is also enough space for cool the brake system. the towing bracket ball coupling. The box is strapped to the spare wheel with tape.

The vehicle tool kit includes the following Fig. 59 Remove the wheel cover. parts (depending on equipment): 1 Screwdriver Removing 2 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts ● Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit* on 3 Towline anchorage the reinforced edge of the wheel trim. 4 Wire hook for removing hub caps ● Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the 5 Jack wheel trim. 6 Box spanner for wheel bolts 7 Clip for wheel bolt cover 46 The essentials

Wheel bolt caps Anti-theft wheel bolts* ● Check the tightening torque as soon as possible with a torque wrench.

Note down the code number stamped on the front of the adapter or of the anti-theft wheel bolt. You will need this number to obtain a spare adapter from the SEAT original accessories programme. You should always have a wheel bolt adapter as part of your vehicle tools.

Fig. 60 Pull off the wheel bolt cap. Fig. 61 Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter. Loosening and tightening wheel bolts Removing Anti-theft wheel bolts (one bolt per wheel) ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the can only be loosened or tightened using a cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 60. factory-supplied adapter. ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. ● Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover. ● Insert the adapter B ››› Fig. 61 with its Fitting toothed side as far as it will go on the interior ● Insert the caps as far as they will go over toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt A so the wheel bolts. that only the outer hexagonal is protruding. ● Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box on adapter B . the spare wheel or in the spare wheel well. Fig. 62 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel ● Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt bolts. ››› page 47. Loosening wheel bolts ● After removing the adapter, replace the hub cap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover. ● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go1). »

1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47. 47 The essentials

● Grip the end of the box spanner and turn Lifting the vehicle the wheel bolt about one turn anti-clockwise ››› Fig. 62.

Tightening wheel bolts ● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go1). ● Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and tighten the bolt firmly by turning clockwise.

WARNING Fig. 63 Changing a wheel: jack position The wheel bolts should only be loosened points. slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!

Fig. 64 Fitting the jack.

To place the jack, locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel to be changed ››› Fig. 63. The jacking point is underneath the stamp on the door sill.

● Raise the jack, turning the crank handle to wind it up under the jacking point until its claw is directly below the jacking point of the door sill.

1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47. 48 The essentials

● Adjust the jack so that its claw surrounds ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs Subsequent work the jacking point on the door sill ››› Fig. 64 - B using the wheel brace. underneath the stamp. ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn ● ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap Make sure that the base of the jack is en- easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect page 46. tirely supported on a flat surface and that it is the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ››› vertical ››› Fig. 64 to the point where the claw ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- surrounds the jacking point on the door sill. ting the wheel. tion. ● Continue to wind up the jack using the ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the crank handle until the defective wheel is spare wheel housing, store it safely in the clear off the ground. Tyres with compulsory direction of ro- luggage compartment ›››  page 137. tation ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible. Removing and fitting a wheel A directional tread pattern can be identified ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- by the arrows on the sidewall that point in cator, adjust the pressure and store it in Change the wheel after loosening the wheel the direction of rotation. Always observe the memory ›››  page 219. bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel to guarantee optimum properties ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel Taking off the wheel of this type of tyres with regard to grip, bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box noises, wear and aquaplaning. que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean- while, drive carefully. spanner and place them on a clean surface. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare ● ● Take off the wheel. tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as with care as this means the tyre does not of- possible. Putting on the spare wheel fer optimum driving properties. This is of particular importance when the road surface is When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation wet. direction, observe the instructions in Snow chains ››› page 49. Replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and restore the obligatory and correct di- Use ● Mount the wheel. rection of rotation of all tyres. ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and Snow chains should only be used on the tighten them loosely with a box spanner. front wheels. » ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

49 The essentials

In winter road conditions, snow chains not Emergency towing of the vehi- only help to improve grip but also improve the braking capacity. cle

For technical reasons snow chains may only Towing be used on tyres with the following wheel rim/tyre combinations.

Rim size Rim offset Tyre size

5J x 14a) 35 mm 175/70 Fig. 66 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing b) 6J x 15 38 mm 185/60 ring. 6J x 15b) 38 mm 195/55 Towline anchorages a) Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater ● Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- than 9 mm. rages. b) Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater than 13 mm. It is located with the vehicle's tools Remove the wheel trims before fitting snow ›››  page 75. chains. ● Screw the front towline anchorage into the CAUTION screw connection ››› Fig. 65 and tighten it with the wheel brace. Chains must be removed when roads are free of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, The rear towline anchorage is under the rear damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. bumper, on the right ››› Fig. 66.

Fig. 65 Right side of the front bumper: tow- Tow rope or tow bar line anchorage screwed in. The tow bar offers increased safety and a lower risk of damage. The tow rope is recommended when there is no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does not damage the vehicle.

50 The essentials

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle The power steering only works when the igni- How to jump start ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving, off. provided that the battery is sufficiently charg- Jump leads ed. Otherwise, it will need more force. ● Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler- Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all The jump lead must have a sufficient wire ate gently (automatic gearbox). times. cross section. If the engine fails to start because of a dis- Driving style  ››› page 78 charged battery, the battery can be connec- Towing requires some experience, especially ted to the battery of another vehicle to start when using a tow rope. Both drivers should the engine. realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- Both batteries need to have nominal voltage experienced drivers should not attempt to Tow-starting of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the back-up bat- tow. tery should not be notably less than the If the engine will not start, first try starting it drained battery. Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle using the battery of another vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. ››› page 51. You should only attempt to tow- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- start a vehicle if charging the battery does 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the not work. This is done by leveraging wheel tions). The wire cross section must be at least anchorage points. movement. 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines. The towline anchorages are located under When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- the floor panel in the luggage compartment. gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- Jump leads Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig- tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen catalytic converter. Positive cable – usually red washer can work. Ensure that the steering ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off. Negative cable – usually black wheel is unlocked and moves freely. ● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down. Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles WARNING ● Switch the ignition on. with a manual gearbox. With an automatic ● A flat battery can also freeze at tempera- gearbox, place the lever in N. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the tures slightly below to 0°C (32°F). Do not at- clutch. tempt to start the vehicle with a frozen bat- To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The tery. Risk of explosion! » brake servo does not work when the engine ● As soon as the engine has started, press is switched off. the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

51 The essentials

● Please note the safety warnings referring to ● The discharged battery must be properly Jump lead terminal connections working in the engine compartment connected to the vehicle electrical system. 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ›››  page 202. ● The jump leads should be checked in a spe- ››› . ● The non-insulated parts of the battery cialist vehicle battery shop. 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to clamps must not be allowed to touch. Addi- + tionally, the jump lead attached to the posi- the positive terminal of the vehicle tive battery terminal must not touch metal with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 67. How to jump start: description parts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit! 3. Connect the other end of the red jump ● Do not connect the negative lead to the lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- negative terminal of the discharged battery. hicle providing assistance B . In the event of sparks when starting the engine, the explosive gas given off by the bat- 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: tery could catch fire. connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal – of the vehicle ● Position the jump leads in such a way that B they cannot come into contact with any mov- providing the current ››› Fig. 67. ing parts in the engine compartment. – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- ● Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acid nect one end of the black jump lead X to a burns! suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of ● The screw plugs on the battery cells must metal in the engine block, or to the engine be screwed in firmly. Fig. 67 Diagram of connections for vehicles block itself ››› Fig. 68. without Start Stop system ● Keep sources of fire (flames, lit cigarettes, 5. Connect the other end of the black jump etc.) away from the battery. - Risk of explo- lead X to a solid metal component bolted sion! to the engine block or to the engine block ● Never use the jump leads on batteries in itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of Do not connect it to a point near the bat- explosion and acid burns. tery A . 6. Position the leads in such a way that they Note cannot come into contact with any moving ● The vehicles must not touch each other, as parts in the engine compartment. electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Fig. 68 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system 52 The essentials

Starting WARNING ● Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ● Please note the safety warnings referring to parts in the engine compartment. boosting battery and let it run at idling working in the engine compartment speed. ›››  page 202. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns. 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat ● The battery providing assistance must have battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and the engine is running. approximately the same capacity (see imprint Note on battery). Failure to comply could result in The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- an explosion. Removing the jump leads erwise electricity could flow as soon as the ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- positive terminals are connected. 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- off the dipped beam headlights if they are ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could switched on. leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear freezes, it should be replaced. Changing the windscreen wiper window in the vehicle with the flat battery. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes blades This helps minimise voltage peaks which away from batteries, danger of explosion. are generated when the leads are discon- Failure to comply could result in an explo- nected. sion. Changing the wiper blades ● Observe the instructions provided by the 11.When the engine is running, disconnect manufacturer of the jump leads. the leads in reverse order to the details ● Do not connect the negative cable from the given above. other vehicle directly to the negative terminal Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. nals. ● Do not attach the negative cable from the If the engine fails to start, switch off the start- other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to er after about 10 seconds and try again after the brake line. about 1 minute. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery Fig. 69 Windscreen wiper blades. clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery Set the windscreen wiper arms to the service terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- position before changing the blades. hicle, this can cause a short circuit. »

53 The essentials

Service position Changing the rear window wiper ● Close the bonnet. blade* ● Switch the ignition on and off. ● Press the lever to position 4 ›››  Fig. 140 ›››  page 125, the windscreen wiper arms are set to the service position.

Taking off the wiper blade ● Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the glass moving the blade slightly in the direction of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 69. Fig. 70 Rear window wiper blade. ● Hold the top of the windscreen wiper arm with one hand. Taking off the wiper blade ● Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand ● Lift the rear window wiper arm away from and remove the blade in the direction of ar- the glass moving the blade slightly in the di- row B . rection of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 70. Fitting the wiper blade ● Hold the top of the rear window wiper arm with one hand. ● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi- ● tion. Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand and remove the blade in the direction of ar- ● Check that the wiper is correctly secured. row B . ● Fold the windscreen wiper arm back down onto the glass. Fitting the wiper blade ● Switch the ignition on and press the lever ● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi- to position 4 ›››  Fig. 140 tion. , the windscreen wiper arms ›››  page 125 ● Check that the wiper is correctly secured. are set to the basic position. ● Fold the rear window wiper arm back down onto the glass.

54 Safe driving

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn Factors influencing safety Safety signals are working properly. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Check tyre pressure. Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra- – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

Safety first! good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as data Technical others on the road , for this reason: – Make sure all luggage is secured ››› This chapter contains important information, ››› page 137. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not tips, suggestions and warnings that you get distracted by passengers or telephone – Make sure that no objects can interfere should read and consider for both your own calls. safety and for your passengers' safety. with the pedals. Advice – Never drive when your driving ability is im- – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). WARNING rors properly according to your size. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● This manual contains important informa- – Ensure that the passengers in the rear tion about the operation of the vehicle, both seats always have the head restraints in – Always reduce your speed as appropriate for the driver and the passengers. The other the in-use position ››› page 59. for road, traffic and weather conditions. sections of the on-board documentation also

contain further information that you should – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take Operation be aware of for your own safety and for the straints according to their height. breaks regularly - at least every two hours. safety of your passengers. – Protect children with appropriate child – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired ● Ensure that the on-board documentation is seats and properly applied seat belts or stressed. kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- ››› page 72. cially important when lending or selling the WARNING vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct

your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a trip, Emergencies sitting position. ››› page 56. the risk of injury and accidents increases. Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly. ››› page 61. Safety equipment

Before starting every trip Safety Never put your safety or the safety of your For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the » before every trip: 55 Safety

risk of injury. The following list includes most Correct position for passengers mend the following adjustments for the driv- of the safety equipment in your SEAT: er:

● three-point seat belts, Correct sitting position for driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear steering wheel and the centre of your chest side seats, ››› Fig. 71. ● belt tensioners for the front seats, – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- ● belt height adjustment for the front seats, wards so that you are able to press the ac- ● front airbags, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, floor with your knees still slightly angled ››› . ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*, ● head-protection airbags, – Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel. ● active front head restraints*, Fig. 71 The proper distance between driver – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in and steering wheel edge is at the same level as the top of your the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, head, or as close as possible to the same ● height-adjustable front head restraints, level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 72. ● rear head restraints with in-use position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- and non-use position, tion so that your back rests completely ● adjustable steering column. against it. The safety equipment mentioned above – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. works together to provide you and your pas- – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you sengers with the best possible protection in have the vehicle under control at all times. the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you Adjustment of the driver's seat and your passengers are sitting in a correct Fig. 72 Correct head restraint position for the ›››  page 11. position and use this equipment properly. driver. WARNING Safety is everyone's business! For your own safety and to reduce the risk of ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver injury in the event of an accident, we recom- can lead to severe injuries.

56 Safe driving

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- least 25 cm distance between the centre of tion so that your back rests completely the chest and the centre of the steering Read the additional information carefully against it. wheel Fig. 71. If you are sitting closer than ›››  page 13. ››› – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you edge is at the same level as the top of your properly. WARNING data Technical head, or as close as possible to the same ● If your physical constitution prevents you ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 59. from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this cm, contact a specialised workshop. The could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in workshop will help you decide if special spe- front of the front passenger seat. ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering

cific modifications are necessary. Advice wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. ● When driving, always hold the steering during driving. risk of accident! wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. firmly holding the upper part of the steering ger airbag in exceptional circumstances This reduces the risk of injury when the driver wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 71. airbag is triggered. ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 points towards your face, the driver airbag ›››  page 11.

o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. Operation will not protect you properly in the event of in the centre of the steering wheel). In such an accident. Make sure that the steering cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- WARNING wheel points towards your chest. tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. ● An incorrect sitting position of the front ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver passenger can lead to severe injuries. during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far Correct sitting position for front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest back! The airbag system and seat belts can senger and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer Emergencies only provide optimal protection when the than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect backrest is in an upright position and the For your own safety and to reduce the risk of you properly. driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- injury in the event of an accident, we recom- ● If your physical constitution prevents you ly. mend the following adjustments for the front from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The ieve optimal protection. Safety – Move the front passenger seat back as far workshop will help you decide if special spe- as possible ››› . cific modifications are necessary. »

57 Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travelling ››› . dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61. incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit- braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 72. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue. senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion: noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle. and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats. sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats. or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel. of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench. sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- to achieve maximum protection. tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways. ● Never lean out of a window. ● Never put your feet out of a window. Examples of incorrect sitting posi- Correct sitting position for rear seat ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. passengers tions ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well. tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- passengers on the rear seat bench must con- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- – Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment. – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially sition ››› page 59. children. 58 Safe driving

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Note portant part of passenger protection and can ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the reduce the risk of injuries in most accident The active head restraints* could also be trig- risk of severe injuries. situations. gered if a vehicle occupant applies a high lev- ● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the el of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper “falling” back into the seat when entering the Technical data Technical are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev- vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- el as the top of your head, or at the very seat head restraint from the rear. This acci- tion. least, at eye level ››› Fig. 73. dental activation is, however, not dangerous, as the active head restraints will return to the ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 128 original position immediately and are thus er sitting position and maintain it throughout

once again ready. Advice the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- Active head restraints* sition during the trip ››› page 56, Correct posi- Vehicle occupants are pressed into their tion for passengers. seats during a rear end collision. The result- Correct adjustment of rear head re- ing body pressure on the seat backrest acti- straints vates the active head restraint* on the front Correct adjustment of front head re- seat, which moves rapidly forwards and up- Operation straints wards at the same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant's head and the head restraint, thus reducing the risk of injuries such as whiplash.

WARNING ● Travelling with the head restraints removed Emergencies or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 74 Head restraints in the correct posi- cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- tion. ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-

pected manoeuvres. Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Safety Fig. 73 Correctly adjusted head restraint as portant part of passenger protection and can ● The head restraints must always be adjus- viewed from the front and the side. reduce the risk of injuries in most accident ted according to the height of the passenger. situations. »

59 Safety

Rear outer seat head restraints Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- – The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 erings over the original floor mats. This positions. Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident. – Three positions for use ››› Fig. 74. In these – Ensure that you can always press the accel- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. positions, the head restraints are used nor- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired An object could move into the pedal area and mally, and along with the rear seat belts, to the floor. impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- protect passengers in the rear seats. den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- – And one position for non-use. not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- paired to their initial positions. celerator pedal. Risk of accident! – To fit the head restraints in position for use, – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- pull on the edges with both hands in the tened during the trip and do not obstruct direction of the arrow. the pedals ››› . Centre rear head restraint* Only use floor mats which leave the pedals – The centre head restraint only has two posi- clear and which are secured to prevent them tions, in-use (head restraint up) and non- from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor use (head restraint down). mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. WARNING If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must ● Under no circumstances should the rear be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop passengers travel while the head restraints the vehicle. are in the non-use position. ● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint Wear suitable footwear with either of the outer seat rear head re- Always wear shoes which support your feet straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals. CAUTION Note the instructions on the adjustment of WARNING the head restraints ››› page 128. ● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious injuries.

60 Seat belts Seat belts – Fasten your seat belt securely. The protective function of seat belts – Instruct your passengers to fasten their The whys and wherefores of seat belts properly before driving off. seat belts – Protect children by using a child seat ac-

cording to the child's height and weight. data Technical

Number of seats The control lamp on the instrument panel lights up  1) if the driver or passenger1) has Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front not fastened their belt when the ignition is and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped switched on. with a three-point seat belt. Advice If, when starting to drive, speed surpasses In some versions, your vehicle is approved 25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seat belts Fig. 75 Drivers with properly worn seat belts only for four seats. Two front seats and two are worn or they are unfastened during the will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- rear seats. drive, a warning sound will be heard for a few den braking seconds. The warning light will also flash . WARNING Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants The  lamp goes out when the driver and

● Never transport more than the permitted in the proper position. They also help prevent Operation passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig- amount of people in your vehicle. uncontrolled movements that may result in nition switched on. ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- serious injury and reduce the risk of being ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- her seat. Children must be protected with an dent. appropriate child restraint system. Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, Emergencies Seat belt lamp*  the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag sys- The control lamp illuminates to remind the tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- driver to fasten his seat belt. gy released in a collision. Taken together, all Before starting the vehicle: these features reduce the releasing kinetic Safety energy and consequently, the risk of injury. »

1) Depending on the model version 61 Safety

This is why it is so important to fasten seat – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat belts before every trip, even when "just driv- at all times and are not damaged. over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- ing around the corner". tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity WARNING Ensure that your passengers wear their seat to protect. belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be that wearing seat belts is an effective means all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The blocked with paper or other objects, as this of substantially reducing the risk of injury optimal protection from seat belts can be can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- and improving the chances of survival when achieved only if you use them properly. curely. involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or properly worn seat belts improve the protec- even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc- similar items to alter the position of the belt tion provided by airbags in the event of an cupants must also wear the seat belts at all webbing. accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the is required by law in most countries. jured. connections, belt retractors or parts of the ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection buckle could cause severe injuries in the Although your vehicle is equipped with air- if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. event of an accident. Therefore, you must bags, the seat belts must be fastened and ● Never allow two passengers (even children) check the condition of all seat belts at regular worn. The front airbags, for example, are only to share the same seat belt. intervals. triggered in some cases of head-on collision. ● ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- The front airbags will not be triggered during dent and stretched must be replaced by a minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion. specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- essary even if there is no apparent damage. bag trigger threshold value in the control unit ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- The belt anchorage should also be checked. cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. is not exceeded. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- Therefore, you should always wear your seat is being worn. belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants moved or modified in any way. ● have fastened their seat belts properly before The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) you drive off! retractors may not work properly because this can cause injuries. ››› page 198. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Safety instructions on using seat ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or belts in any other incorrect position. – Always wear the seat belt as described in this section. 62 Seat belts

Physical principles of a frontal colli- called “kinetic energy” is created both in the Even at low speeds the forces acting on the sion passengers and inside the vehicle. body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers the speed of the vehicle and the weight of are thrown forward and will make violent con- the vehicle and its passengers. The higher tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, data Technical the speed and the greater the weight, the windscreen or whatever else is in the way more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an ››› Fig. 76. accident. It is also important for rear passengers to The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other-

speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles Advice wise be thrown forward violently through the from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- netic energy is multiplied by four. Fig. 76 A driver not wearing a seat belt is danger not only themselves but also the front thrown forward violently Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- occupants ››› Fig. 77. ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed Operation solely by said impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

even higher. Emergencies Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on Fig. 77 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the collision, they will move forward at the same driver wearing a seat belt speed their vehicle was travelling just before

the impact. This example applies not only to Safety It is easy to explain how the laws of physics head-on collisions, but to all accidents and work in the case of a head-on collision: when collisions. a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

63 Safety

How to properly adjust your ing sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the seatbelt automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked. Fastening and unfastening the seat The automatic belt retractors on the front belt seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ››› page 65.

Seat belt release ● Press the red button on the belt buckle ››› Fig. 78 B. The latch plate is released and Fig. 79 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder springs out ››› . and pelvis area for pregnant women. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged. Fasten your seat belt The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if Positioning seat belts the seat belt is not positioned correctly. Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. ly when they are properly positioned. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch The following features are available to adjust plate and pull it slowly across your chest and the seat belt in the shoulder region: lap. ● belt height adjustment for the front seats. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is ● front seat height adjustment*. securely locked with an audible click WARNING Fig. 78 Positioning and removing the seat ››› Fig. 78 A. belt buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is ● The seat belts offer best protection only securely engaged in the buckle. when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened prop- The seat belts are equipped with an automat- erly. ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of dom of movement is permitted when the another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- 64 Seat belts not protect you properly and the risk of injury Belt height adjustment Seat belt tensioners is increased. ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- How the seat belt tensioner works cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. Read the additional information carefully Technical data Technical ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- ›››  page 13. vere injuries in the event of an accident. The seat belts for the occupants in the front ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- on the centre of the shoulder, never across sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur- the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli- Advice comfortably on the torso sions and only if the seat belt is worn. This ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across Fig. 80 Location of the belt height adjuster. retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the pelvis, never across the stomach. The the forward motion of the occupants. seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to be used to adjust the proper belt position at take up any slack. the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle the shoulder. ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the overturns, or in accidents where no major seat belt must lie as low as possible over the – Press the upper part of the shoulder belt forces act on the vehicle. Operation pelvis, never across the stomach, and always guide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 80. lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the Note – Move the shoulder belt guide up or down abdomen ››› Fig. 79. until you have adjusted the seat belt ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a ● Always engage the retractor lock when you ››› page 64. fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 not an indication of fire in the vehicle. – After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt ››› page 72. ● The relevant safety requirements must be Emergencies ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 62. sharply to check that the catch on the observed when the vehicle or components of shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regulations, which are also available to you. Safety

65 Safety

Service and disposal of belt tension- work, must be performed by a specialised Airbag system ers workshop only. ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- Brief introduction The belt tensioners are components of the tection for one accident and must be changed seat belts that are installed in the seats of if they have been activated. your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- Why is it so important to wear a seat ers or remove and install parts of the system belt and to sit correctly? when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may For the inflating airbags to achieve the best be that, in the event of an accident, the belt protection, the seat belt must always be worn tensioners function incorrectly or may not properly and the correct sitting position must function at all. be assumed. So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- The airbag system is not a substitute for seat sioner is not reduced and that removed parts belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's do not cause any injuries or environmental overall passive safety system. Please bear in pollution, regulations, which are known to mind that the airbag system can only work ef- the specialised workshops, must be ob- fectively when the vehicle occupants are served. wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. There- WARNING fore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is re- ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- quired by law in most countries, but also for vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may your safety ››› page 61, The whys and where- fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- fores of seat belts. cumstances. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or if you are not properly seated when the air- install parts of the belt tensioners or seat bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- belts. ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- occupants assume a correct sitting position matic retractor cannot be repaired. while travelling. ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat Sharp braking before an accident may cause belts, including the removal and refitting of a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be system parts in conjunction with other repair thrown forward into the area of the deploying 66 Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil- The airbag system operation is monitored inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- pant. This also applies to children. or the restraint system is not appropriate for luminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis). Always maintain the greatest possible dis- their age, size or weight. tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you This way, the front airbags can completely lean forward or to the side while travelling or There is a fault in the system if the control data Technical  deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- assume an incorrect sitting position, there is lamp : mum protection. a substantially increased risk of injury. This ● does not light up when the ignition is increased risk of injury will be further in- switched on ››› page 68, The most important factors that will trigger creased if you are struck by an inflating air- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle bag. Advice of collision and the speed of the vehicle. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating is switched on ● Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- airbag, always wear the seat belt properly turns off and then lights up again after the ››› page 61. pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration ignition is switched on rate resulting from the collision and detected ● Always adjust the front seats properly. ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration moving. occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- Description of airbag system The airbag system is not triggered if: Operation fied reference values, the front, side and/or ● the ignition is switched off curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- The airbag system mainly comprises (as per ● to account that the visible damage in a vehi- vehicle equipment): there is a minor frontal collision ● there is a minor side collision cle involved in an accident, no matter how ● an electronic control and monitoring sys- serious, is not a determining factor for the tem (control unit) ● there is a rear-end collision airbags to have been triggered. ● ● frontal airbags for driver and passenger, the vehicle turns over. Emergencies WARNING ● side airbags, WARNING ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ● curtain airbags, ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to ● a control lamp  on the dash panel maximum protection if the occupants are critical or fatal injuries. ››› page 68. seated correctly ››› page 56, Correct position ● Safety All vehicle occupants, including children, ● key-operated switch for front passenger air- for passengers. who are not properly belted can sustain criti- bag, ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. have the system checked immediately by a Children up to 12 years old should always ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the front passenger airbag. specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a » 67 Safety

frontal collision the system might not trigger The control unit analyses the collision trajec- Airbag and seat belt tensioner control correctly or may fail to trigger at all. tory and activates the respective restraint lamp  system. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- The control lamp monitors all airbags and Airbag activation fined reference value in the control unit the seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including airbags will not be triggered, even though control units and wiring connections. The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within the accident may cause extensive damage to thousandths of a second, to provide addi- the car. Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys- tional protection in the event of an accident. tem A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- The following airbags are triggered in seri- Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- ous head-on collisions operation is constantly monitored electroni- tion of fire in the vehicle. ● Driver airbag. cally. Each time the ignition is switched on, the control lamp  illuminates for several The airbag system is only ready to function ● Front passenger front airbag when the ignition is on. seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument panel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER. In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri- bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions The system must be checked when the con- In the event of minor head-on and side colli- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- trol lamp  : sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent. ● does not light up when the ignition is over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- switched on, dent. ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition Activation factors ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- is switched on The conditions that lead to the airbag system cident. ● turns off and then lights up again after the activating in each situation cannot be gener- ignition is switched on alised. Some factors play an important role, In an accident with airbag activation: ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior moving. cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle light switch is in the courtesy light position); speed, etc. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; In the event of a malfunction, the warning Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- lamp stays on continuously. In addition, de- ● all doors are unlocked; vation. pending on the malfunction, a fault message ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. appears on the instrument panel display for approximately 10 seconds and a short audible warning is given. In this event, you 68 Airbag system should have a specialised workshop check ● If a malfunction occurs, have the system sition, or in any other manner (e.g. in the cen- the system immediately. checked immediately by a specialised work- tre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if The airbag system availability is controlled shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag is triggered, you may sustain inju- electronically, regardless of whether an air- the airbag system and belt tensioners may ries to the arms, hands and head. not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor- bag is disabled.

rectly. data Technical If the front airbag, side airbag, head protec- Side airbags* tion airbag or the belt tensioner are disabled using the diagnostics system: Airbag safety instructions Read the additional information carefully ● After switching on the ignition, the  warn- ›››  page 15. Advice ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds and Front airbags flashes for another 12 seconds. WARNING ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean The informative display indicates: Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 14. forward, or are not seated correctly while the Airbag/belt tensioner disabled! vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk WARNING of injury if the side airbag system is triggered If the front passenger airbag has been disa- in an accident.

● The deployment space between the front Operation bled with the airbag switch located in the ● In order for the side airbags to provide their passengers and the airbags must not in any storage compartment side: maximum protection, the prescribed sitting case be occupied by other passenger, pets position must always be maintained with ● When the ignition is turned on, the  and objects. warning lamp illuminates for about 4 sec- seat belts fastened while travelling. ● The airbags provide protection for just one onds. ● Occupants of the outer seats must never accident; replace them once they have de- carry any objects or pets in the deployment ● The airbag is disabled, signalled with the ployed. space between them and the airbags, or al-

warning lamp   which lights up with the Emergencies ● It is also important not to attach any ob- low children or other passengers to travel in      word placed in the cen- jects such as cup holders or telephone this position. It is also important not to at- tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81 mountings to the surfaces covering the air- tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to ››› page 71. bag units. the doors. This would impair the protection ● Do not attempt to modify components of offered by the side airbags. WARNING the airbag system in any way. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only Safety ● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and ● When driving, always hold the steering for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any belt tensioner system cannot properly per- wheel with both hands on the outside part at heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. » form its protective function. the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock po- 69 Safety

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, system may not work correctly. All work car- scribed sitting position must always be main- must not be exerted upon the backrest ried out on the front door must be done in a tained with seat belts fastened while travel- bolster because the system may be damaged. specialised workshop. ling. In this case, the side airbags would not be ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must triggered. not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a ● Under no circumstances should protective ure the pressure increase on the interior of screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. covers be fitted over seats with side airbags the doors, due to air escaping through the See your technical service to make this ad- unless the covers have been approved for use areas with holes or openings in the door pan- justment. in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys el. ● There must be no other persons, animals or from the side of the backrest, the use of con- ● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels objects between the occupants of the rear ventional seat covers would obstruct the side have been removed. seats and the deployment space of the head- airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- ● protection airbags so that the head-protec- tiveness. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been tion airbag can deploy without restriction and ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery correctly fitted. provide the greatest possible protection. or around the seams of the side airbag units Therefore, sun blinds which have not been ● must be repaired immediately by a special- Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers expressly approved for use in your vehicle ised workshop. in the door panels have been removed, un- may not be attached to the side windows less the holes left by the loudspeakers have ● The airbags provide protection for just one been closed properly. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only accident; replace them once they have de- for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any ● ployed. Always check that the openings are closed heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. or covered if loudspeakers or other equip- Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang- ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- ment are fitted inside the door panels. moval and installation of the airbag compo- ers. ● nents for other repairs (such as removal of Any work carried out to the doors should be ● The airbags provide protection for just one the front seat) should only be performed by a made in an authorised specialised workshop. accident; replace them once they have de- specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may ployed. occur during the airbag system operation. ● Any work on the head-protection airbag ● Do not attempt to modify components of Curtain airbags* system or removal and installation of the air- the airbag system in any way. bag components for other repairs (such as re- ● The side and head airbags are managed Read the additional information carefully moval of the roof lining) should only be per- through sensors located in the interior of the ›››  page 16. formed by a specialised workshop. Other- front doors. To ensure the correct operation of wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys- the side and curtain (head) airbags neither WARNING tem operation. ● the doors nor the door panels should be ● In order for the head-protection airbags to Do not attempt to modify components of modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak- provide their maximum protection, the pre- the airbag system in any way. ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag 70 Airbag system

● The side and head airbags are managed ● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an Note through sensors located in the interior of the orthopaedic seat without side airbags). ● Follow the current legislation in your coun- front doors. To ensure the correct operation of try regarding the disabling of airbags. the side and curtain airbags neither the The front passenger front airbag can be disa- doors nor the door panels should be modified bled using the switch ››› page 71. ● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find information on which vehicle airbags can be in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the We recommend that you contact an author- data Technical disabled. front door is damaged, the airbag system ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air- may not work correctly. All work carried out bags. on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop. Airbag system control Front passenger front airbag switch The airbag system availability is controlled Advice electronically, regardless of whether an air- Deactivating airbags bag is disabled.

Deactivation of the front airbag If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics system: The disabling of airbags is only carried out in ● the airbag system warning lamp  illumi- certain cases, i.e. if: nates after switching on the ignition for Operation ● a child seat is required in the front passen- about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about ger seat with the child facing in the opposite 12 seconds. direction to the direction of travel (in some countries, due to divergent legal require- If the airbag has been disabled with the air- ments, facing in the direction of travel) bag switch on the side of the dash panel: page 74; ● the airbag control lamp  will illuminate ››› Emergencies for about 4 seconds after the ignition is ● despite the driver's seat being in the cor- switched on, rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm cannot be maintained between the centre of ● the airbag is disabled, signalled with the the steering wheel and the driver's torso, warning lamp   which lights up with the word      placed in the cen-

● installation of special devices is required in Safety tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 81 3 . the steering wheel area due to a physical dis- ability, Fig. 81 Front passenger front airbag switch/warning lamp for disabling the front passenger airbag. » 71 Safety Read the additional information carefully If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault Transporting children safely ›››  page 14. in the disabling of the airbag system ››› . Please go immediately to an Official Service. The switch disables only the front passenger Safety for children front airbag. WARNING Introduction Switching on the airbag ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. – Switch the ignition off. For safety reasons, as we have learned from ● Always switch off the ignition before disa- accident statistics, we recommend that chil- – Open the passenger side storage compart- bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear ment. so could result in a fault in the airbag disa- seats. Depending on their age, height and bling system. – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for weight, children travelling in rear seats must deactivating the front passenger airbag ● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- ››› Fig. 81. About 3/4 of the key should en- switch as it could get damaged or enable or sons, the child seat should be installed in the disable the airbag during driving. ter, as far as it will go. rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or ● If the   (airbag disabled) control lamp in the centre back seat. – Then turn the key gently to the  position. flashes, the front passenger front airbag will Do not force it if you feel resistance, and not trigger in the event of an accident! Have The physical laws involved and the forces make sure you have inserted the key fully. the system immediately checked by an Offi- acting in a collision apply also to children cial Service. page 63. But unlike adults, children do not – Close the passenger side storage compart- ››› have fully developed muscle and bone struc- ment. tures. This means that children are subject to – Check, with the ignition switched on, that a greater risk of injury. the   control lamp does not illuminate, To reduce the risk of injuries, children must with the words      in the always use special child restraint systems centre of the dash panel. when travelling in the vehicle.    Control lamp with the word We recommend the use of child safety prod-   (front passenger airbag disabled) ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- If the front passenger front airbag is disa- gramme, which includes systems for all ages bled, after switching on the ignition, the con- made by “Peke” (not for all countries). trol lamp will illuminate for several seconds, These systems have been especially de- then it will switch off for about 1 s and then signed and approved, complying with the switch on again. ECE-R44. regulation.

72 Transporting children safely

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- ● Never allow a child to be transported in a observe any statutory requirements when in- bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 71. vehicle without being properly secured, or to stalling and using child seats. Always read When transporting children, use a child seat stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. and note ››› page 73. suitable for the age and size of each child In an accident, the child could be flung ››› page 72. through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- We recommend you always carry the manu-

juries to themselves and to the other vehicle data Technical facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- WARNING occupants. gether with the on-board documentation. ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- ● If children assume an improper sitting posi- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the Important information regarding the ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an Advice front passenger's airbag accident. This is particularly important if the ● An inflating front passenger airbag can child is travelling on the front passenger seat strike the rear-facing child seat and project it Read the additional information carefully and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- with great force against the door, the roof or ›››  page 16. dent; as this could cause serious injury or the backrest. even death. Read and always observe the safety informa- ● Never install a child seat facing backwards ● A suitable child seat can protect your child! tion included in the following chapters: on the front passenger seat unless the front ● passenger front airbag has been disabled. Never leave a child alone in the child seat Operation ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! or inside the vehicle because depending on ger airbag ››› page 66, Why is it so important However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- the season, very high temperatures may be to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?. ses, to transport a child in the front passen- reached inside a parked vehicle, which could be fatal. ● Objects between the passenger and the ger seat, the front passenger front airbag passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags must always be disabled ››› page 71. If the ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall front passenger seat has a height adjustment on page 69. must not wear a normal seat belt without a option, move it to the highest position. child seat, as this could cause injuries to the Emergencies The passenger side front airbag, when ena- ● For those vehicles that do not include a key abdominal and neck areas during a sudden bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- braking manoeuvre or in an accident. backward since the airbag can strike the seat cle must be taken to a technical service. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat with such force that it can cause serious or ● All vehicle occupants, especially children, ››› page 74, Child seats. fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old must assume the proper sitting position and should always travel on the rear seat. be properly belted in while travelling. Safety Therefore we strongly recommend you to ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, transport children on the rear seats. This is this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- the child! 73 Safety

Child seats Categorisation of child seats into We recommend you to always include the groups manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual Safety instructions together with the on-board documentation. Use only child seats that are officially ap- SEAT recommends you use child seats from Read the additional information carefully proved and suitable for the child. the Original Accessories Catalogue. These ›››  page 16. Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- child seats have been designed and tested R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis- for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the WARNING sion for Europe Regulation. right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers. ● When travelling, children must be secured The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable ries: for age, weight and size. WARNING ● Read and always observe information and Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats months) warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 73. ››› page 73. Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 months) WARNING ● The retaining rings are designed only for Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system years old) child seats. Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 ● Never secure other child seats that do not years old) have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or retaining belts or objects to the fastening Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju- years old) ries to the child. ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- Child seats that have been tested and ap- rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se- proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the curing rings. test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it). Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats.

74 Self-help

Emergencies Note Vehicle tool kit* ● Observe the expiry date of the contents of Read the additional information carefully Self-help the first aid kit. ›››  page 46 ● We recommend you use the first-aid kit and the warning triangle from the SEAT Original WARNING data Technical Emergency equipment Accessories programme available in authorised SEAT dealers. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model of vehicle. First-aid kit and warning triangle* On no account attempt to use it for lighting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury!

Fire extinguisher* ● Make sure that the vehicle tools are stored Advice properly in the luggage compartment. Read the instructions given on the fire extinguisher carefully. Note The fire extinguisher must be checked once a year by an authorised person (take the appli- ● Make sure the box always remains strap- cable legal regulations into account). ped to the spare wheel with tape.

● The jack does not generally require any Operation WARNING maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease. Fig. 82 Location of the warning triangle. The fire extinguisher must be properly secured so that it is not catapulted through the The warning triangle, measuring max. vehicle, causing injuries, during driving and 436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secured to the lin- braking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac- Changing a wheel ing on the rear of the luggage compartment cident. Emergencies with rubber straps ››› Fig. 82. Introduction Note WARNING ● The fire extinguisher must comply with lo- Read the additional information carefully The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must be cal legal requirements. ›››  page 46 properly secured so that they are not catapul- ●

Observe the expiry date of the fire extin- Safety ted through the vehicle during driving and guisher. The fire extinguisher may not work WARNING braking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac- properly if used after the expiry date. ● If you have a puncture in moving traffic, cident. Risk of injury. switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle at the obligatory » 75 Emergencies

distance. Observe applicable local legal regu- CAUTION foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and lations. This is for your own safety and that of take care not to slip. ● The prescribed tightening torque for wheel other drivers. bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. ● If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty ● If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as and difficult to turn when changing a wheel, ● If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight- far away as possible from moving traffic. Stop they must be replaced before having the ened, this could damage the bolt and the on flat, solid ground. tightening torque checked. adapter. ● If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar ob- Note ject under it to prevent the vehicle from roll- ● The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or the Tyre repairs ing away unexpectedly. adapter are available from authorised SEAT ● If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres or dealers. TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobility alloys that are different to those fitted in ● Please observe the relevant local legal reg- System)* manufacture, the instructions ››› page 217, ulations when changing the wheel. New tyres or wheels must be followed. Read the additional information carefully ● Always raise the vehicle with the doors ›››  page 45 closed. Wheel bolts The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a box ● Never place parts of your body, e.g. arms under the carpet in the boot. and legs, underneath the vehicle when it is The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. Using the Tyre Mobility System you can relia- supported only by the jack. When installing different wheels, e.g. to fit bly seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies, ● Secure the base of the jack with suitable light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres, provided that cuts or punctures are no larger supports so that it cannot slip. The jack could it is important to use the correct wheel bolts than approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not re- slide if the ground below it is soft and slip- with the right length and correctly shaped move the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails, pery and the vehicle could slip off it. There- bolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit of from the tyre! fore, place the jack on a firm surface or use a the wheels and for proper operation of the large, stable base. On a slippery surface, e.g. brake system. The tyre must be repaired immediately. tile, use a non-slip base such as a rubber mat. The repair made using the Tyre Mobility Sys- Note ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is tem under no circumstances replaces perma- jacked. Risk of injury. ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolts! nent tyre repair and should only be used to ● The jack should only be used in the correct ● If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may be drive to the nearest official service. jacking points. possible to loosen it by pushing down the end of the box spanner carefully with your

76 Self-help

The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not be ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- Note used: rary emergency use only until you can reach ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at the nearest specialised workshop. ● If the wheel rim has been damaged, SEAT dealerships. ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- ● when the outside temperature is below ● Take into account the separate instruction bility set as soon as possible. -20°C (-4°F), manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- ● data Technical ● on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm, The sealant is a health hazard and must be er. cleaned immediately if it comes into contact ● if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam- with the skin. aged, ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the Components of the tyre mobility set* ● If you have been driving with very low tyre reach of small children. Advice pressure or a completely flat tyre ● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has ● If the best-before date on the air can has been approved for your vehicle. expired ● Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake lever firmly and engage gear if using a WARNING manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the Operation roadside. Please observe the following rules WARNING to minimise the risk of injury: A tyre filled with sealant does not have the ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. same performance properties as a conven- Park it at a safe distance from surrounding tional tyre. traffic to fill the tyre. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and Fig. 83 Standard representation: contents of and solid. Emergencies fast cornering. the anti-puncture kit. ● All passengers and particularly children ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum must keep a safe distance from the work area. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check The anti-puncture kit is located underneath ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre. the floor covering in the luggage compart- other road users. ment. It includes the following components

● ››› Fig. 83: Safety Use the tyre mobility system only if you are For the sake of the environment familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- 1 erwise, you should seek professional assis- Dispose of used or expired sealant observing Tyre valve remover tance. any legal requirements. 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” » 77 Emergencies

3 Filler tube with cap good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- WARNING tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. 4 Air compressor Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous 5 Tube for inflating tyres and can cause accidents and serious injury. 6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- CAUTION ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure toring system (it can also be integrated in Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. the compressor). mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- ● Seek specialist assistance. heating! Before switching on the air compres- 7 Air bleed screw (in its place, the compressor again, let it cool for several minutes. sor may have a button). 8 ON/OFF switch Towing the vehicle 9 12 volt connector Check after 10 minutes of driving 10 Bottle of sealant Introduction Screw the inflator tube Fig. 83 5 again 11 Spare tyre valve ››› and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . Read the additional information carefully The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the ›››  page 50. lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towed can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed using a towbar or towrope. They can also be way. This also applies to its replacement part sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. towed with either the front or rear wheels lif- 11 . ● You should obtain professional assistance ted off the road. WARNING ››› . Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be towed using a towbar or towrope. They can also When inflating the wheel, the air compressor 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: be towed with the front wheels lifted off the and the inflator tube may become hot. ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value road. If the vehicle is towed with the rear ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. again. wheels lifted off the road the automatic gear- ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or box will be damaged! ● hot air compressor on flammable material. Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop with- Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31 ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). mph). vice. ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

78 Self-help

CAUTION Note Front towline anchorage ● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine ● We recommend you use the towrope or tow- damage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert- bar available in the SEAT Original Accessories er, fuel that has not been burned could reach programme from authorised SEAT dealers. the catalytic converter and catch fire in it. ● Towing a vehicle requires a certain degree Technical data Technical This could damage and destroy the catalytic of practical skill. Both drivers should be fa- converter. You may use the battery from an- miliar with the technique required for towing. other vehicle to help you start your engine Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to ›››  page 52. tow away another vehicle or to have their ve- ● If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear- hicle towed. box, the car may only be towed with the driv- ● Note the legal regulations concerning tow- Advice en wheels lifted clear of the road and trans- ing, particularly those regarding the signal- ported on a special vehicle transporter or ling of the towed and towing vehicle. trailer. ● The towrope must not be twisted, as under ● If normal towing is not possible or if the ve- certain circumstances this could unscrew the hicle is to be towed for further than 50 km, front towline anchorage. the vehicle must be transported on a special

vehicle transporter or trailer. Operation ● The towrope should be slightly elastic to reduce the load on both vehicles during towing. It is advisable to use a towrope made of synthetic fibre or similar material only. ● Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle Fig. 84 Front bumper: towline anchorage cov- and always take care to avoid jerking the tow- er/fitting. rope. When towing on a loose surface there is Emergencies always a risk of overloading and damaging Fitting and detaching the cover the anchorage points. – Press on the left of the cover as indicated ● Attach the towrope or towbar only to the by the arrow ››› Fig. 84 . towline anchorages or to the removable towing bracket ››› page 184, or ››› page 79. – Pull on the cover to remove it from the front Safety bumper. – To refit the cover after unscrewing the towline anchorage, fit the cover and press »

79 Emergencies

down on its right-hand side. The cover Fuses and bulbs WARNING must be securely engaged. The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns Fitting and detaching the towline anchorage Fuses and even death! – Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock- Introduction ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- wise by hand as far as it will go ››› Fig. 84 tion system. . Due to the constant updating of vehicles, ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the To tighten the towline anchorage, we recom- fuse assignments based on equipment and electrical system. mend using the box spanner, the towing eye the use of the same fuse for various electrical from another vehicle or a similar object that components, it is not possible to provide an WARNING can be inserted through the anchorage. up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for the electrical components at the time this Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or – Unscrew the towline anchorage by turning manual was printed. For detailed information bridging a current circuit without fuses can it clockwise. cause a fire and serious injury. about the fuse positions, please consult a technical service. ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only CAUTION replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- The towline anchorage must be screwed in as In general, a fuse can be assigned to various age (same colour and markings) and size. far as it will go. Otherwise there is a risk of electrical components. Likewise, an electrical ● Never repair a fuse. component can be protected by several the screw connection shearing off during ● fuses. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple towing or tow-starting! or similar. Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted CAUTION fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric ised workshop as soon as possible. system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from the igni- Additional information and warnings: tion. ● Working in the engine compartment ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating ››› page 202. fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.

80 Fuses and bulbs

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Fuses in the dash panel No. Consumer vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system. 6 Central control unit - Interior lights ● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- 7 Horn ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. 8 Towing bracket - Left light data Technical Controls on steering column (without Keyless Ac- Note cess only), engine control unit (without Keyless Access only), automatic gearbox control unit ● One component may have more than one (without Keyless Access only), automatic gear-

fuse. 9 box lever (without Keyless Access only), ESP Advice ● Several components may run on a single control unit (without Keyless Access only), trailer fuse. hook control unit (without Keyless Access only), electric power steering (without Keyless Access ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than Fig. 85 Diagram of the fuse box to the only) those indicated in this chapter. These should left/right of the steering wheel only be changed by a specialised workshop. 10 Rear left window ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- Read the additional information carefully 11 Headlight washer unit pear in the following tables. ›››  page 43 Operation 12 Radio and navigation display ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same below pertain only to certain versions of the amperage (same colour and markings) and 13 Preparation as taxi model or are optional extras. size. ● Please note that the above lists, while cor- Control lever under steering wheel, light switch, traction locking with ignition key (automatic rect at the time of printing, are subject to Fuse placement 14 transmission), headlight flasher, SmartGate con- change. trol device, rain/light sensor, rear camera

No. Consumer Emergencies Air conditioning system control unit, automatic 1 Left light 15 gearbox selector lever, diagnostics connection Central locking, windscreen wipers, with Keyless 2 Access 16 Instrument panel

3 Ignition system relay 17 Alarm sensor, horn Safety Windscreen washer system (without Keyless Ac- 4 Right light 22 cess) 5 Electric windows - Driver 23 Heated front seats » 81 Emergencies

No. Consumer No. Consumer Fuses in the engine compartment

Air conditioning fan, heating, control unit for air 12 V connection in the interior, 12 V connection 24 44 conditioning, heating in the boot

26 Front seat heating switch. 45 Rear right window

27 Rear window wiper Windshield and front window washing system, 46 control lever under the steering wheel 29 Airbag 47 Towing bracket - Connector contact Electric windows, reversing light switch, air conditioning control unit, Park Assist control unit, 48 Towing bracket - Right hand light 30 exterior mirror, power supply for middle button bar, power supply for the side button bar, interi- 49 Fuel pump control unit or mirror 50 Radio Fuel pump, radiator fan control unit, cruise con- 31 trol, relay coil for the windscreen and rear win- 51 Heat for exterior mirrors dow washer system, switch for the lights 52 Keyless Access Diagnostics socket, headlight range regulator, 53 Steering lock (Keyless Access) 32 control lever under the steering wheel, ambient lighting regulator 54 ABS/ESC control unit

33 Ignition relay coil, clutch pedal switch 56 Diagnosis 34 Heatable washer jets of windscreen washer 59 Full LED Fig. 86 In the engine compartment: fuse box 36 USB charging socket cover - 1st variant

37 Radar

39 Additional electric heating

41 Rear window heater

42 Electric windows - passenger

43 Towing bracket - Connector contact

82 Fuses and bulbs

● Open the cover in the direction indicated No. Consumer by the arrow 2 . Engine components, fuel coil relay, radiator fan, ● Remove the plastic clip from the lid of the 14 coolant pump fuse box. ● Replace the appropriate fuse. 15 Engine control unit Technical data Technical ● Place the plastic clip back in its original po- 16 Starter motor sition. 17 Engine control unit ● Place the lid on the fuse box and press un- Engine components, additional electric heat re- til you hear it click into place. 18 lay coils Advice Fuse placement 19 Lambda probe No. Consumer Control devices for the glow system, heating of 20 1 Radiator fan the sump fan

2 Control unit for the glow system

3 ABS/ESC control unit Changing bulbs Operation 4 Additional electric heat - Circuit 2 Introduction Fig. 87 In the engine compartment: fuse box 5 Additional electric heat - Circuit 3 cover - 2nd variant 6 Automatic gearbox Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 44. Read the additional information carefully 7 Engine control unit ›››  page 43 Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, Emergencies 8 Front windscreen wipers there are different sets of headlights and tail Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same lights: amperage (same colour and markings) and 9 Central control unit, battery data module size. 10 ABS/ESC control unit ● Halogen main headlights (double headlight). 12 Engine components Safety Opening the fuse box ● Full-LED main headlights*. ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 202. 13 Brake pedal switch ● Rear bulb light. ● Press lid locking clip upwards in the direc- ● LED rear light*. » tion of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 86 o ››› Fig. 87. 83 Emergencies

Full-LED headlight system* WARNING ● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on Full-LED headlights handle all light functions ● Take particular care when working on com- your vehicle is functioning properly. This is (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped ponents in the engine compartment if the en- not only in the interest of your own safety, beam and route light) with light emitting di- gine is warm. Risk of burns. but also that of all other road users. odes (LEDs) as a light source. ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you glass can break when you touch the bulb, Full-LED headlights are designed to last the have the correct new bulb. lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be causing injury. ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to ● When changing bulbs, please take care not your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel an authorised workshop to have it replaced. to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head- instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on light housing. the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat Double headlight bulb change generated by the bulb, they will be deposited Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of CAUTION on the reflector and damage its surface. practical skill. If in doubt, we recommend you ● Remove the ignition key before working on have defective bulbs changed by a special- the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit ised service or, in case of an emergency, could occur. Double headlight bulbs seek professional assistance. ● Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb. ● Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before changing a bulb. For the sake of the environment ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis- glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- pose of used bulbs in the proper manner. erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and causing condensation on the reflector sur- Note face, thus reducing effectiveness. ● Depending on weather conditions (cold or ● A bulb must only be replaced by one of the wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the rear Fig. 88 Main headlight bulbs. same type. The type is indicated on the bulb, lights and the turn signals may be temporari- either on the glass part or on the base. ly misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on Installation position of double headlight ● There is a storage area for the bulb box in bulbs the spare wheel well or below the carpet in the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. the luggage compartment. A However, the edges may continue to be mis- Side lights ted. B Main beam headlights 84 Fuses and bulbs

C Dipped beam headlights Changing main beam headlight bulb Changing dipped beam light bulbs D Turn signal lights E Daylight Technical data Technical Changing side light bulbs Advice

Fig. 90 Changing main beam headlight Fig. 91 Changing dipped beam headlight bulbs. bulbs: wheel housing.

– Raise the bonnet. – Remove the protective cover. Operation Fig. 89 Changing side light bulbs. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 90 1 by pulling outward. – Raise the bonnet. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so – Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 89. that it fits correctly into the recess on the – Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 89 1 by reflector. pulling it outwards. – Installation involves all of the above steps Emergencies – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit in reverse sequence. Fig. 92 Changing dipped beam headlight bulbs. the new one. – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the cover fits correctly on the housing during – Installation involves all of the above steps – Turn the wheel for access to the wheel operation. in reverse sequence. housing cover and remove the cover – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the – Check whether the new bulb is working. ››› Fig. 91. Safety cover fits correctly on the housing during – Remove the protective cover from the head- operation. light ››› Fig. 92. » – Check whether the new bulb is working. 85 Emergencies

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 92 1 by pulling – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 93 1 anti- – Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder outward. clockwise and remove it. and turn clockwise as far as it will go. – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 92 2 – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Check whether the new bulb is working. pressing clockwise and inwards. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the same time. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess – Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder Changing the fog light bulbs on the reflector. and turn clockwise as far as it will go. – Fit the connector. – Check whether the new bulb is working. Front fog light bulb – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the cover fits correctly on the housing during operation. Changing daytime driving light bulbs – Replace the wheel housing cover. – Check whether the new bulb is working.

Changing turn signal bulbs

Fig. 95 Front fog light.

Fig. 94 Changing daytime driving light bulbs.

– Raise the bonnet. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 94 1 anti- clockwise and remove it. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb Fig. 93 Changing turn signal bulbs. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the same time. – Raise the bonnet. Fig. 96 Front fog light.

86 Fuses and bulbs

– Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 95 1 from the fog – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 97 2 anti- Changing the rear lights (on light grille with a screwdriver. clockwise and pull. the side panel) – Subsequently, remove the clips located on – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb the edge of the grille with gentle leverage. holder and turning it counter-clockwise at Removing the rear light1) the same time. – Remove the bolts (3x) ››› Fig. 96 2 to re- data Technical move the fog light. – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. – Remove the metal clip situated on the upper part of the fog light by pulling towards – Check that the bulb works properly. the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 96 3 . Advice

Removing the bulb holder

Fig. 98 Remove the rear light unit from side panel. Operation

Check which of the bulbs is defective. – Open the luggage compartment to access the rainduct area. – Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turn- Emergencies Fig. 97 Front fog light. ing anti-clockwise) and remove the two retaining screws that secure the front of the – Remove connector ››› Fig. 97 1 from the light ››› Fig. 98 1 , taking care not to lose bulb. them. » Safety

1) In the case of LED rear lights of the side panel only the turn signal lamp can be changed. The illustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb version and do not correspond exactly to the LED version. 87 Emergencies

– Pull the rear light unit backward (››› Fig. 98 – Disconnect the light connector A – Lightly press the defective bulb into the 2 ) to remove the light from its housing. ››› Fig. 99 by moving its side levers (arrows) bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and and pulling the connector outwards. remove it. – Place the light on a level, horizontal surface – Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb Removing the bulb holder on top of a soft cloth so as not to scratch holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will the outer glass. go. – Unscrew the four retaining screws from the – Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from bulb holder anti-clockwise using a screw- the glass part of the bulb. driver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehi- – Check that the new bulb works properly. cle tool kit ››› Fig. 100. Take care not to lose the bulb holder retaining screws. – Replace the bulb holder. – Screw in the bulb holder using the four screws, turning them clockwise. Changing bulbs Position of the bulbs Fig. 99 Light connector at the rear of the rear light unit. ››› Fig. 101 Bulb function

A Turn signals: PY21W NA LL

B Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W

C Side lights: P21/5W

Note Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a replacement can be acquired from an Official Fig. 101 Position of the bulbs in the bulb Service. holder

Fig. 100 Retaining screws on reverse side of The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten- rear light unit. er. The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.

88 Fuses and bulbs

Fitting the rear light – Press the rear light unit backwards (driving direction) by fitting the fastenings into the rubber mountings ››› Fig. 102 A . – Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehicle tool kit and tighten (turning clockwise ››› Fig. 103) the two retaining data Technical screws that secure the front of the light.

Changing tail lights (on the Advice

Fig. 102 Fit the tail light unit. rear lid) Removing the bulb holder1) Operation

Fig. 105 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs. Fig. 103 Fit the tail light unit. Emergencies You can access the bulb holder for the inner – Make sure the connector is correctly in Fig. 104 Remove the cover from the boot lid. tail lights through the inside of the rear lid. place. – Check which of the bulbs is defective. » Safety

1) For rear-lid LED rear lights, only the reverse and retro fog bulb can be replaced. The illustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb version and do not correspond exactly to the LED version. 89 Emergencies

– Open the cover to access the lights, turning – Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb – Make sure the connector is correctly in it by hand in the direction indicated by the holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will place. arrows. go. – Close the inner trim cover. – Access the lights by disconnecting the con- – Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from nector 1 ››› Fig. 105  and unscrewing the glass part of the bulb. Note the bulb holder ››› Fig. 105 . Take care not – Check that the new bulb works properly. Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a to lose the bulb holder retaining screw. replacement can be acquired from an Official – Re-install the bulb holder ››› page 90. – Change the bulbs ››› page 90. Service. – Screw in the bulb holder.

Position of the bulbs Changing bulbs ››› Fig. 106 Bulb function

A Reversing lights: P21W

B Side lights: R5W LL

C Fog lights: P21W

Note One of the two sides may not be fitted with a fog light, depending on the country and type of driving. In this case, the hole for the light Fig. 106 Position of the bulbs in the bulb is covered. holder

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten- Fitting the bulb-holder er. The table below gives an overview of the bulbs ››› table on page 90. – Position the bulb holder on the tail light – Lightly press the defective bulb into the and align it so that it is securely seated. bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and – Screw in the bulb holder using the corre- remove it. sponding screw.

90 Fuses and bulbs

Changing the bulb on the num- – Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards ››› Fig. 108. ber plate – Installation involves all of the above steps Removing the bulb holder in reverse sequence.

Note data Technical Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an authorised workshop for replacement. Advice

Fig. 107 Removing number plate light Operation Emergencies

Fig. 108 Changing the bulb. Safety – Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb ››› Fig. 107.

91 Operation

Fig. 109 Interior.

92 Controls and displays Operation – Navigation system – Driver heated seat ...... 128 10 Hazard warning lights switch ...... 121 – Park assist system ...... 167 Controls and displays 11 Control lamp for front passenger – Central lock button ...... 109 airbag deactivated warning lamp . . 71 – Heated rear window ...... 123

12 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 71 data Technical General instrument panel – Start-Stop system ...... 181 13 Depending on the equipment, – Front passenger heated seat . . . . 128 1 Electric window controls ...... 115 glove compartment with: ...... 131 26 Depending on the equipment: 2 Control for adjusting electric exteri- – CD player* and/or SD card* – Heating controls ...... 144 or mirrors ...... 126 ››› Booklet Radio – Air conditioning controls ...... 145 Advice 3 Air outlets ...... 143 14 Front passenger airbag ...... 14 – Climatronic controls ...... 147 4 Multifunction switch lever: 15 Light switch ...... 117 – Turn signals, headlights, parking 16 Headlight range control ...... 117 Note lights, headlight flasher ...... 118 17 Bonnet release lever ...... 203 The location of the controls of right-hand – Cruise control system ...... 174 18 Fuse compartment ...... 81 drive cars differs slightly from the location shown here ››› Fig. 109. However, the sym- 5 Steering wheel: 19 Steering column adjustment lev- Operation bols correspond to the respective controls. – With horn er ...... 13 – With the driver front airbag ...... 14 20 Ignition lock ...... 151 – With controls for audio, naviga- 21 USB/AUX-IN input ...... 104 tion system and telephone ...... 100 22 Depending on the equipment: 6 General instrument panel: instru- – Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . . 156

ments and warning lamps ...... 93 Emergencies – Selector lever (automatic gear- 7 Multifunction switch lever: box) ...... 158 – Multifunction display ...... 23 23 Depending on the equipment: – Windscreen wipers and wind- – Drink holder ...... 132 screen washers ...... 125 – Ashtray holder ...... 134 Safety 8 Air outlets ...... 143 24 Rear shelf ...... 131 9 Depending on the equipment: 25 Depending on the equipment, con- – Audio system trols for: 93 Operation Instruments and warning lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 110 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 110: ator) before the needle reaches the red 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 98. zone ››› . 1 Rev counter (with the engine running, in WARNING hundreds of revolutions per minute). 2 Engine coolant temperature display ››› page 205. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with The beginning of the red zone of the rev the risk of injury. counter indicates the maximum speed in 3 Displays on the screen. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- any gear after running-in and with the en- 4 Adjuster button and display trols when driving. gine hot. However, it is advisable to ››› page 97. change up a gear or move the selector 5 Speedometer. lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- 94 Instruments and warning lamps

CAUTION We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Shift lever position ››› page 158. that you follow the recommendations on the ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev gear-change indicator. Consult the additional counter needle should only remain in the red ›››  page 25. information in ›››  page 25. zone for a short period of time. ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs with different setting options ›››  page 23. CAUTION data Technical and heavy acceleration and do not make the ● Service interval display ›››  page 30. engine work hard. Never allow the rev counter needle 1 ››› Fig. 110 to go into the red zone on the ● Second speed display ›››  page 26. scale for more than a very brief period, other- ● Speed warning function ›››  page 29. For the sake of the environment wise there is a risk of engine damage. ● Start-Stop system status display Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con- Advice ››› page 181. sumption and noise. For the sake of the environment ● Low consumption driving status (ECO) Changing up a gear early will help you to save ››› page 96 fuel and minimise emissions and engine ● Rev counter noise. Identifying letters on engine (MKB).

The rev counter indicates the number of en- Distance travelled gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 110 1 . Operation Indications on the display The odometer registers the total distance Together with the gear-change indicator, the travelled by the car. rev counter offers you the possibility of using A variety of information can be viewed on the The odometer (trip) shows the distance the engine of your vehicle at a suitable instrument panel display ››› Fig. 110 3 de- travelled since the last odometer reset. The speed. pending on the vehicle equipment: last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. The start of the red zone on the dial indicates ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open the maximum engine speed which may be Emergencies ›››  page 25. ● Briefly press the button Fig. 110 4 to re- used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ››› ● Information and warning texts. set the trip recorder to 0. ter it has been run in properly. Before reaching this range, you should change to a higher ● Mileage. ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for ● Time. seconds and the previous value will be dis- automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in played. » Safety ● Navigation instructions. “D” or take your foot off the accelerator pedal. ● Outside temperature. ● Compass.

95 Operation

Time Second speed display (mph or km/h) panel when the vehicle is in low consump- ● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 110 In addition to the speedometer, the speed tion status. 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select can also be displayed in a different unit of the hour or minute display. measurement (in miles or in km per hour). Identifying letters on engine (MKB) ● To continue setting the time, press the up- This option cannot be deactivated in models Hold the button ››› Fig. 110 4 down for more per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- destined for countries in which the second than 15 seconds to display the identifying ton down to scroll through the numbers speed must always be visible. letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do quickly. this, the ignition must be switched on and The second speed display can be adjusted in the engine switched off. ● Press the button 4 again in order to finish the Easy Connect system via the  key and setting the time. the Setup function button ››› page 99. WARNING The time can also be set via the  key and Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning Setup function button in the Easy Connect Speed warning and control lamps on page 98. system ››› page 99. When the speed setting is exceeded, this will be indicated on the instrument panel display. WARNING Compass This is very useful, for example when using winter tyres that are not designed for driving Even though outside temperatures are above With the ignition on and the navigation sys- freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy. tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to at the maximum speed of the vehicle ● At outside temperatures above +4°C the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- ›››  page 29. (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol” played on the instrument panel. The speed warning settings can be adjusted is not visible, there may still be patches of ice in the Easy Connect system via the  key on the road. Selector lever position and the Setup function button . ››› page 99 ● Never rely on the outside temperature indi- The selected gear is displayed on the side of cator! the selector lever and on the instrument pan- Start-Stop operating display el display. In positions D and S, and with the Updated information relating to the status is Note Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- displayed on the instrument panel ● played. ››› page 181. Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Low consumption driving status (ECO)* case of displays without warning or informa- The recommended gear in order to save fuel Depending on the equipment, when driving, tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by is displayed on the instrument panel while the “ECO” display appears on the instrument the warning lamps. you are driving ›››  page 25. 96 Instruments and warning lamps

● Depending on the equipment, some set- Odometer/trip recorder Engine cold tings and instructions can also be carried out The odometer shows the total distance cov- If only the diodes in the lower part of the in the Easy Connect system. ered by the vehicle. scale light up, this indicates that the engine ● When several warnings are active at the has not yet reached operating temperature. The trip recorder shows the distance that has same time, the symbols are shown succes- Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and

been travelled since it was last reset. It is data Technical sively for a few seconds and will stay on until do not make the engine work hard. the fault is rectified. used to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or tenths of a mile. Normal temperature If in normal operations, the diodes light up The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- Odometer until the central zone, it means that the ening 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 111. Advice gine has reached operating temperature. At high outside temperatures and when making Fault display the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder is no cause for concern, provided the control display. Have the fault repaired immediately, lamp  does not light up on the instrument as far as is possible. panel digital display. Operation

Heat range Engine coolant temperature display When the diodes light up in the upper area of the display and the control lamp appears  Fig. 111 Instrument panel: odometer and re- For vehicles with no coolant temperature on the instrument panel display, the coolant set button.  gauge, a control lamp appears for high temperature is excessive ››› page 208. coolant temperatures page 208. Please ››› Emergencies The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- note ››› . CAUTION tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change the measurement units (kilometres The coolant temperature gauge 2 ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, “km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*. ››› Fig. 110 only works when the ignition is avoid high revs, driving at high speed and Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- making the engine work hard for approxi-

Manual for more details. age, please read the following notes for the mately the first 15 minutes when the engine Safety different temperature ranges. is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature* ››› page 205 as a guide. » 97 Operation

● Additional lights and other accessories in panel a warning signal lights up  and an switch off when the engine starts running, or front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect audible signal sounds. while driving. of the coolant. At high outside temperatures The informative display indicates: Depending on the model, additional text and high engine loads, there is a risk of the messages may be viewed on the instrument engine overheating. Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles) panel display. These may be purely informa- ● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- tive or they may be advising of the need for CAUTION bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is action ››› page 94. moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- Never completely empty the tank! An irregu- duce the cooling effect, which could cause larity in the fuel supply system can cause ir- Depending upon the equipment fitted in the the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- regularities when the engine is running. Un- vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- tance. burned fuel can reach the exhaust gas sys- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- tem, which can cause deterioration of the cat- strument panel. alytic converter. When certain control and warning lamps are Fuel level gauge lit, an audible warning is also heard. Note ● Some vehicles come fitted with the fuel WARNING gauge on the general instrument panel. If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- ● The message on the display switches off ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may only after refuelling and carrying out a short cause accidents and severe injuries. journey. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Control lamps ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no highly flammable materials under the vehicle that could come into Fig. 112 Fuel gauge. Warning and control lamps contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel). The fuel gauge ››› Fig. 112 operates only Read the additional information carefully ● when the ignition is switched on. ›››  page 32. A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users. If The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li- The control and warning lamps are indicators necessary, switch on the hazard warning tres. When the needle reaches the fuel re- of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func- lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- serve area there are only approximately 7 li- tions. Some control and warning lamps come vise other drivers. tres left in the tank. In the general instrument on when the ignition is switched on, and 98 Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the Introduction to the Easy Function buttons in the Page engine and allow it to cool. vehicle settings ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a Connect system* menu hazardous area and could cause severe injuries ››› page 202. System settings (CAR)* ESC system ››› page 154 Technical data Technical Tyres ››› page 219 CAUTION CAR menu (Setup) Driver assistance ››› table on page 21 Failure to heed the control lamps and text Read the additional information carefully messages when they appear may result in Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 167 ›››  page 21 faults in the vehicle. Vehicle lights ››› table on page 21 Advice To select the settings menus, press the Easy Connect  button and the Setup function Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 21 button. Opening and closing ››› table on page 21 The actual number of menus available and Multifunction display ››› table on page 21 the name of the various options in these menus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics Date and time ››› table on page 21

and equipment. Operation Units ››› table on page 21 Pressing the menu button will always take Service ››› page 30 you to the last menu used. When the function button check box is activa- Factory settings ››› table on page 21 ted , the function is active. WARNING Pressing the menu button  will always take Emergencies you to the last menu used. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect Any changes made using the settings menus system while driving could distract you from are automatically saved on closing those me- traffic. nus. Safety

99 Operation Communications and multimedia

Steering wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driver. There are two versions of the multifunction module:

● Audio system + telephone without voice control version (MID): for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. ● Audio system + telephone with voice control version (HIGH): for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 100 Communications and multimedia

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID) Technical data Technical Advice Fig. 113 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up Operation calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu. B phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument Hold down: reject an incoming panela). panela). panela). panela). call/switch to private mode/rediala).

Short press: switch to the previ- C Search for last station ous song No function No function No function Emergencies Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next D Search for the next station song No function No function No function Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Safety E , F panela) panela) panela) panela) panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source »

101 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Changes menu or memory Turn: Next/previous presetb) Turn: Next/previous songb) Turn: No function Turn: Acts on the MFD on instrument panel H Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Confirm Press: Operates on instrument panel

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)

Fig. 114 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu. phone menu on the dash pan- B ela). ela). ela). Hold down: reject an incoming ela). Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) call/switch to private/redial Hold down: rediala) mode

102 Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Short press: switch to the previ- Radio/media functionality (ex- C Search for last station ous song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next data Technical Radio/media functionality (ex- D Search for the next station song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panel panel panel panel panel Advice G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- located located located H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the menu option menu option dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the menu option menu option menu option Operation a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu. Emergencies Safety

103 Operation

Multimedia Opening and closing ● The remote control function may be temporarily limited by interference from other USB/AUX-IN input transmitters near the vehicle that operate on Remote control the same frequency (e.g. mobile phone, tele- vision transmitter). General notes ● If the central locking system or the anti- theft alarm only responds to the remote con- Read the additional information carefully trol at a distance of less than 3 metres, then ›››  page 9 the battery must be replaced ››› page 106. ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- The remote control key can not be locked using the remote control. ● Lock and unlock the vehicle ● Unlock or open the rear lid

The remote control transmitter and the bat- Unlocking and locking the vehicle Fig. 115 USB/AUX-IN input. teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote control key Depending on the features and the country, has a maximum range of 30 metres. The the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec- range is reduced as the batteries start to lose tion. power. The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the The key includes a foldaway part that can be storage compartment in the front centre con- used to manually lock or unlock the vehicle sole ››› Fig. 115. and to start the engine. The operating description is located in the re- If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is respective Instruction Manuals of the audio paired or changed, the remote control key system or the navigation system. must be adapted by an authorised SEAT deal- Fig. 116 Remote control key er. Only then can the remote control key be used again. Unlocking the vehicle  – Press button 1 . Note ● The remote control is automatically deacti- Locking the vehicle  vated when the ignition is switched on. – Press button 2 .

104 Opening and closing

Deactivating the Safe lock WARNING ● Open the door using the key within the next minute. – Press button 2 twice in 2 seconds. Further Do not leave people or animals in vehicles information ››› page 107. locked from outside with the Safe lock activated: the doors and windows cannot then be Unlocking the rear lid  opened from the inside. Doors locked in this

Keys data Technical manner could delay assistance in an emer- – Press button 3 . Further information gency. Risk of death! ››› page 114. General notes

Unfolding the key shaft Note

– Press button 4 . ● Only use the remote control when the Advice doors and the rear lid are locked and the ve- Folding the key shaft hicle is within sight. ● Do not press the lock button  on the re- – 4 Press button and fold the key shaft back mote control before inserting the key in the to its original position. ignition, otherwise the vehicle could be locked by mistake. Should this occur, press The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- the unlock button  on the remote control. hicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked Operation using button 1 and none of the doors or the rear lid is opened in the following 30 seconds, the vehicle will automatically relock Remote control synchronisation and the Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm will be activated. This function prevents the vehi- f the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked cle from being unlocked by mistake. using the remote control, the key code may

not match that of the control unit. This can Emergencies Locking indication occur when the remote control buttons are frequently pressed outside the range of the Fig. 117 Key with remote control/Key without The turn signals will flash if the vehicle has system or if the remote control battery has remote control. been correctly locked. been replaced. Two keys are always supplied with the vehi-

Should any of the doors or the rear lid remain Safety cle. Depending on the model version, your open when the vehicle is locked, the turn sig- In this case, it must be synchronised as follows: car may include keys without remote control nals will only flash when they are closed.  ● Press any key on the remote control key. ››› Fig. 117 or with remote control ››› Fig. 117 . »

105 Operation

WARNING Replacing the battery in the remote Changing the battery ● Never leave the key inside whenever you control key ● Unfold the vehicle key shaft. leave the vehicle - even if only for a moment. ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- This is particularly important if children are hicle key ››› Fig. 118 in the direction of the ar- to remain in the vehicle. Children might start row ››› . the engine or some other electrical component, e.g. electric windows. Risk of injury! ● Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 119. ● Wait until the vehicle has completely stopped before taking the key out of the ignition. ● Place the new battery in the compartment Otherwise the steering wheel may lock sud- as shown ››› Fig. 119, pressing in the oppo- denly. Risk of accident! site direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . CAUTION ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 118, pressing Fig. 118 Vehicle key: opening the battery it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite ● Each key contains electronic components compartment and must, therefore, be protected from damp- direction to that shown by the arrow until it ness and strong vibrations. clicks into place. ● Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean. CAUTION Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has a negative impact on locks, ignition, etc. ● If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Note ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- Should a key be lost, request a duplicate key place the dead battery with another of the from an Authorised SEAT dealer. same voltage, size and specifications. ● When fitting the battery, check that the po- larity is correct. Fig. 119 Vehicle key: removing the battery

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised For the sake of the environment workshop to replace the battery. Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environment. The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover.

106 Opening and closing

Note tow-away protection system ››› page 113. Go Note to a technical service. If it is not possible to unlock or lock the vehi- ● Activation of the single door setting can be cle with the remote control key once the bat- requested at your SEAT dealer. tery has been replaced, it will need to be re- Individualised settings ● In the event of an accident in which the air- synchronised ››› page 105. bags deploy, the doors will be automatically Technical data Technical unlocked for easier access and assistance. Unlocking single doors ● If the central locking system should fail to This optional function unlocks the driver door Central locking system work at any time, only the driver door can be only. The other doors remain locked and are locked or unlocked using the key only unlocked when the next command is giv- ››› page 108. All other doors and the boot General notes en (unlock). hatch can be operated manually. Advice – Manual release ›››  page 10. All of the doors, the boot lid and the fuel cap Automatic unlock and lock flap will1) unlock at the same time when the – Manual release of the rear lid central locking system is used. The doors and the rear lid are locked auto- ›››  page 10. matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph). Warning lamp on the driver door Once the doors are locked, the warning lamp The doors unlock automatically when the key Operation will flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at a is removed from the ignition. Additionally, slower rate. the driver or front passenger can unlock the doors by pressing the  ››› page 109 central If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engag- lock button or by pulling the front door han- ed ››› page 108, the warning lamp on the dle. driver door will flash quickly for 2 seconds before switching off for 30 seconds and then WARNING Emergencies flashing at a slower rate. Locking the doors prevents intruders from If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 sec- getting into the car, e.g. while waiting at in- onds and then remains switched on before tersections. However, it can also delay assis- flashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds, tance in the event of an accident. Risk of there is a fault in the interior monitor and death! Safety

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 107 Operation

Unlocking with key Note Safe Lock

If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft The central locking system is equipped with a alarm system, you have 15 seconds from the Safe lock. If the vehicle is closed from out- time the door is opened to insert the key in side, the door locks will automatically lock. the ignition and start the vehicle. If, during these 15 seconds, the vehicle is not started, The warning lamp on the driver door will the alarm is triggered. flash quickly for about 2 seconds and then at a slower rate. It is not possible to open any of the doors from the inside or outside using the handle. This limits the possibility of in- Lock with key truders getting into the vehicle. – Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinder The Safe lock can be deactivated by pressing in the reverse direction to its lock position the lock button twice in less than 2 seconds. Fig. 120 Key positions during vehicle locking B ››› Fig. 120. and unlocking. If Safe lock is out of service, the control lamp ● The doors, the boot lid and the fuel tank on the driver door will flash quickly for about – Turn the key in the driver door in the for- flap1) will be locked. 2 seconds before switching off for 30 seconds and then flashing at a slower rate. ward driving direction to its unlock position ● The courtesy lights switch off. A ››› Fig. 120. The Safe lock is re-activated on unlocking ● The Safe lock is immediately activated. – Pull the handle and open the door. and locking the vehicle again. ● Warning lamp on the driver door starts to If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock is ● All doors (driver door only on vehicles with flash. deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from anti-theft alarm) are unlocked. Note inside by pulling on the door handle. ● The rear lid is unlocked. The vehicle doors cannot be locked if the ● The fuel tank flap is unlocked1). WARNING driver door is open. ● The courtesy lights switch on. Do not leave people or animals in locked ve- ● The Safe lock is deactivated. hicles with Safe lock activated: the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the in- ● The driver door warning lamp stops flash- side. Doors locked in this manner could delay ing (on vehicles not equipped with an anti- assistance in an emergency. Risk of death! theft system) ››› page 112.

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 108 Opening and closing

Note Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the fuel Note tank flap1) ● The anti-theft alarm switches on automati- The handles and the central lock buttons will cally when the vehicle is locked, even if the – Press the button  ››› Fig. 121. The warning not work if the Safe lock ››› page 108 is acti- Safe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle interior lamp  on the button will light up. vated. monitoring, however, is not activated. Technical data Technical ● Given that the Safe function will be activa- Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the ted on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEADLOCK fuel tank cap1) will be shown on the general instrument pan- – Press the button  ››› Fig. 121. The warning el display. On vehicles equipped with an in- lamp  on the button will switch off. formative display, Caution SAFE! On- board documentation! If the vehicle has been locked using the cen- Advice tral lock button. ● The rear boot lid cannot be unlocked from Central locking button the outside (security measure, e.g. when stopped at an intersection). ● The doors can be unlocked individually by

pulling the handle. Operation ● The vehicle doors cannot be locked if any of the doors are open. ● In the event of an accident in which the airbags activate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked for easier access and assistance. Emergencies

WARNING Fig. 121 Central lock button. The central locking system remains operative If the vehicle has not been locked from out- when the ignition is switched off. Never leave side, it is possible to lock and unlock the children unattended in the vehicle, as doors doors from inside by pressing the ››› Fig. 121 locked from the inside delay assistance in an Safety button, even without the key in the ignition. emergency. Risk of sustaining fatal injuries!

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 109 Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehicle valid vehicle key is required to be in an area Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- with Keyless Access near ››› Fig. 122 the vehicle and one of the Entry) sensor surfaces to be touched on the door ● Grip the door handle. In doing this, the handles . ››› Fig. 123 sensor surface ››› Fig. 123 A (arrow) is touched on the handle and the vehicle un- General information locks. If a valid key is located in the proximity of the ● Open the door. car ››› Fig. 122, the Keyless Access lock and ignition system gives the key entry as soon On vehicles without a "safe" security sys- as one of the sensor surfaces on the door tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex- handles is touched or the push button on the it) boot hatch is operated. The following features are then available without having to ● Switch the ignition off. Fig. 122 Keyless Access locking and ignition use the vehicle key actively: ● Close the driver's door. system: in the proximity of the car. ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with on the door handle. The door being operated the handles on the four doors or the button must be closed. located on the boot hatch. ● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For On vehicles with a "safe" security system: this to occur, there has to be a valid key in- shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit) side the vehicle and the ››› page 151. ● Switch the ignition off. ● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with one of the four door handle. ● Close the driver's door. ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) The central locking and locking systems oper- on the door handle. The vehicle locks with ate in the same way as a normal locking and the "safe" security system ››› page 108. The Fig. 123 Keyless Access locking and ignition unlocking system. Only the controls change. door being operated must be closed. system: sensor surface A for unlocking in- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow) side the door handle and sensor surface B double flash of the indicator lights; locking on the door handle to lock the vehicle with- for locking on the exterior of the handle. by a single flash. out the "safe" security system ››› page 108. Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- The vehicle will lock again after a few section system to unlock and lock the vehicle onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open without actively using its key. For this, only a any door or boot hatch. 110 Opening and closing

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub- windows will close. If the water jet or steam When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto- bing against it), all proximity sensors are dis- is briefly moved away from the sensor sur- matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 122 abled for a time. If this only happens with the face A on one of the handles and then poin- there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. exterior sensor on the driver's door, only this ted at it again, all the windows will probably sensor is disabled. open ››› page 111, Convenience functions.

Open or close the hatch normally data Technical ››› page 113. Sensors will again be enabled: Note After closing, the hatch locks automatically. ● After a time. ● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, In the following instances, the rear lid does ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire- not lock automatically after closing: ton  on the key. ly out of charge, it is likely that the vehicle will not be able to be lock or unlocked with Advice ● If the entire vehicle is unlocked. ● OR: if the boot is opened. the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can ● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All be unlocked or locked manually Convenience functions vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The ›››  page 9. vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if To close all electric windows, the sun roof ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or no door or boot hatch are opened. and electric tilting panoramic roof with the the system fails to detect one, a warning will convenience feature, keep your finger for a display on the dash panel screen. This could

Locking the vehicle with a second key few seconds on the lock sensor surface happen if any other radio frequency signal in- Operation ››› Fig. 123 B located on the exterior part of terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo- If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and the driver or passenger door handle until the bile device accessory) or if the key is covered it is locked from the outside with a second windows and roof close. by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay- blocked for engine ignition ››› page 149. In Opening the doors by touching the sensor er of salt, how the sensors on the door han- order to enable engine ignition, the button  surface on the handle takes place in accord- dles operate may be affected. If this is the on the key inside the vehicle needs to be ance with the settings activated on the menu case, wash the vehicle ››› page 193. Emergencies pressed ››› page 104. Configuration - Convenience. ● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear CAUTION Automatically disabling sensors stick is in position P. If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a The sensor surfaces on the door handles long period of time, the proximity sensor on could engage if hit with a water jet or high Safety the passenger door is automatically disa- pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key bled. in the nearby area. If at least one of the windows is open and the sensor surface B on If the exterior sensor on the door handle is one of the handle permanently activates, all often activated unusually with the vehicle 111 Operation

Child-proof locking Anti-theft alarm system* When does the system trigger an alarm? The following areas of the vehicle are moni- General notes tored: ● Bonnet The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicle protection from intruders. The system will ini- ● Rear lid tiate acoustic and optical warning signals ● Doors when your vehicle is tried to be forced. ● Ignition ● Tilt angle ››› page 113, Vehicle interior Activating the alarm system monitoring and anti-tow system The anti-theft alarm switches on automatical- ● The interior ››› page 113, Vehicle interior ly when the vehicle is locked using the re- Fig. 124 Activating the childproof lock. monitoring and anti-tow system mote control key or inserting the key in the ● The childproof lock prevents the rear doors driver door. The alarm is activated around 30 Drop in voltage in the car systems from being opened from the inside. Doors seconds after the vehicle is locked. ● The factory-fitted towing bracket can only be opened from the outside. Deactivating the alarm system The alarm is triggered immediately if one of The childproof lock is activated and deactiva- the battery cables is disconnected while the ted using the ignition key. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated alarm system is active. when the remote control unlock button is Activating the childproof lock pressed. If the vehicle is not opened within How to turn OFF the alarm 30 seconds after emitting the radio frequen- – Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow cy signal, the system will be reactivated. To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock but- ››› Fig. 124 (in the other direction on the ton on the remote control key or switch on right-hand door). If the vehicle is unlocked using by inserting the ignition. the key in the driver door, the ignition must Deactivating the childproof lock be switched on within 15 seconds. This deac- Note tivates the alarm system. If, during these 15 – Turn the slot in the opposite direction of ● seconds, the vehicle is not started, the alarm The alarm horn power supply has a 5-year the arrow (in the other direction on the useful life. Contact an Official Service for is triggered. right-hand door). more detailed information. ● To make sure that the anti-theft alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle, check that all the doors and windows are closed. 112 Opening and closing

● Remote control and receiver unit coding – Lock the vehicle within the next 30 sec- unlocked by pressing the  button on the means that the remote control cannot be onds. remote control key 2 ››› page 104, the boot used on other vehicles. lid can be re-opened for a certain length of The Vehicle interior monitoring system and time. the tow-away protection system are reactivated when the vehicle is unlocked again. Where required, the automatic boot lid lock- Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- ing time extension function can be activated data Technical tow system Note or deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service, which will provide all of the necessary infor- ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and mation. the tow-away protection system must be de-

activated if there is a danger of the alarm be- Before the vehicle locks automatically, there Advice ing triggered due to movements by children is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. or animals in the interior when being trans- Therefore, we recommend you always lock ported (e.g. by boat or by train) or towed. the vehicle by pressing the  button on the ● The effectiveness of the Vehicle interior remote control or by using the key without re- monitoring system is reduced if the spectacle mote control ››› page 108. case is left open. Always close the storage compartment before locking the vehicle to ensure that this monitoring system operates Operation Fig. 125 Button for vehicle interior monitor- correctly. ing and the tow-away protection system.

The Vehicle interior monitoring system is activated if movements are detected in the interi- Rear lid or of the vehicle. Tailgate automatic lock Emergencies Deactivating Vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection system Where the vehicle has been locked by press-  – Switch the ignition off. ing the button on the remote control with the boot lid open, the boot lid will lock auto-

– Open the driver door. matically when closed. Safety – Press the  ››› Fig. 125 button on the cen- The automatic rear lid locking time extension tre column. The red backlit symbol  on function can be activated. When this function the button turns orange. is activated and once the boot lid has been

113 Operation

Rear lid This system may or may not be operative, de- ● Closing the rear lid without observing and pending on the situation of the vehicle. ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be to you and to third parties. Make sure that no opened, however if it is unlocked then the one is in the path of the rear lid. opening system is operative and the rear lid ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- may be opened. closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! To change the locking / unlocking status, ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave  press the button or the button 1 the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened ››› Fig. 116 on the remote control key. if the key is left inside. A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the boot lid is open or not properly Note Fig. 126 Rear lid: opening from the outside. closed.* An audible warning is also given if ● Once the rear lid is closed, its lock is en- the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is gaged and the alarm system is activated. On- moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. ly valid if the vehicle has been locked before the rear lid is closed. WARNING ● The release catch located at the top of the ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of registration plate recess is deactivated on ac- accident or injury. celerating or at speeds of over 5 km/h (3 ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down mph). The catch is reactivated when the vehi- with your hand on the rear window. The glass cle comes to a standstill and a door is could smash. Risk of injury! opened. ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- Fig. 127 Close-up of the inside trim of the ing. rear lid: hand grip ● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected Read the additional information carefully to extremely high and low temperatures, de- ›››  page 10 pending on the time of year, thus causing se- The rear lid opening system operates electri- rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal cally. It is activated by using the handle on consequences. Close and lock both the rear the boot lid. lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

114 Opening and closing

Opening and closing of electric Closing ● Always make sure all of the windows are windows – Press the respective button gently to close closed on leaving the locked vehicle. the window. The process will stop when the button is released. Operation of the electric windows Note

Safety button  ● The vehicle heating and ventilation system data Technical should be used to ventilate the interior while Press the safety button 5 ››› Fig. 128 to de- driving. Leaving the windows open could al- activate the controls on the rear doors. Press- low dust and other dirt to enter the vehicle ing the safety button 5 again will reactivate and cause unpleasant noises at certain the controls on the rear doors. speeds. Advice If the rear door controls are deactivated, the ● Do not leave the side windows open at high warning lamp  on the safety button 5 will speeds, as this will overly increase fuel con- light up. sumption.

WARNING Note Fig. 128 Detail of the driver door: controls for ● When locking the vehicle from the outside, The electric window opening mechanism is

the windows. make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle, equipped with a thermostat switch. This may Operation as the windows cannot be opened from the overheat if the window is opened and closed Read the additional information carefully inside in an emergency. repeatedly. This causes the window to lock ›››  page 11 ● For safety reasons, use safety button 5 temporarily. Once the thermostat switch has cooled down, the window can be operated The electric window opening and closing sys- ››› Fig. 128 that deactivates the window once again. tem only works when the ignition is switched switches on the rear doors when children are travelling in the rear seats. on. Emergencies

Opening CAUTION Roll-back function on the electric windows – Press gently on the respective button on ● Keep the windows clean to ensure the sys- the door to open the window. The process tem operates correctly. The electric windows are equipped with a will stop when the button is released. ● Defrost ››› page 196, Windows and mirrors

roll-back system that reduces risk of injury Safety any frozen windows before use. Otherwise – when closing windows. » The driver door window can also be auto- you run the risk of damaging the electric win- matically opened by pressing the button as dow riser mechanism. far as it will go (fully open). Press the button again to immediately stop it. 115 Operation

If an obstacle is present, the closing mecha- Lights and visibility ignition key and open the door. Once the nism will stop and the window will roll back a driver door is closed (ignition off), the audi- few centimetres. Lights ble warning will stop, whereas the side lights If an obstacle prevents closing for the next will remain on to light up the stationary vehicle in case this is necessary. 10 seconds, the closing mechanism will once Introduction again stop and the window will roll back an- ● Depending on weather conditions (cold or other few centimetres. wet), the lights may mist up temporarily on Read the additional information carefully the inside. This is particularly the case in the If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to close ›››  page 18 event of a difference in temperature between the window after it has rolled back the sec- the inside and in front of the light. By switch- The location of the controls of right-hand ond time, only the closing mechanism will be ing on the lights, the area through which the drive cars differs slightly from the location stopped even if the obstacle is still present. beam of light is projected will quickly be shown here ››› Fig. 129 ››› page 117. Howev- The roll-back function is still connected. demisted, although the edges may remain er, the symbols indicating the respective po- misted. The real lights and turn signals can The roll-back function will only be disconnec- sitions of the controls remain the same. mist up. This has no influence on the useful ted if you once again attempt to close the life of the lighting system. window in the following 10 seconds. In this WARNING case, the window will close at full force. Never drive with only the side lights on! The If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the roll- side lights are not bright enough to illumi- Control lamps back function will be once again connected. nate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is dark or if  It lights up visibility is poor. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.

CAUTION  It lights up ● Use the lights in line with local law. Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 120. ● However, drivers always remain responsible for correctly adjusting and using the It lights up lights.  Left or right turn signal. Note The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty ››› page 118. ● An audible warning will be heard when the light control is set to  and you remove the

116 Lights and visibility

 It lights up Side light and dipped beam headlight Main light range control 

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 118.

 It lights up Technical data Technical Bulb failure ››› page 83 For example, the information display indicates: Check front right dipped headlight!

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Advice ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Fig. 129 Instrument panel: light control. Fig. 130 Instrument panel: light range control. onds. Switching on side lights – Turn the control ››› Fig. 130 to set the lights WARNING – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position to the required setting. . Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning and control lamps on page 98. Positions Operation Switching on dipped beam The control positions roughly correspond to Note – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position the following vehicle load conditions. . The rear side lights and number plate light - Two front occupants, luggage compart-  ment empty. contain several bulbs. The control lamp Switching off lights (except daytime driving lights up only when there is a fault in all the lights) 1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment number plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of a empty. Emergencies combined tail light). Therefore it is advisable – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position to regularly check the bulb operation. 0. 2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment fully loaded. 3 Driver only, luggage compartment fully loaded. Safety

CAUTION Always adjust the range of the lights so that: »

117 Operation

● Your vehicle does not dazzle others, partic- Switching the daytime running light off Note ularly oncoming traffic ● Remove the key from the ignition, press the Please observe any relevant legal require- ● The range of the headlights is sufficient for turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press ments which may apply in your country. safe driving it back to flash position and hold it here. ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, Note holding it in this position for 3 seconds. Turn signal and main beam lever Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime Make sure you set the range of the main lights when the dipped beam headlights are running light is now deactivated and the cor- switched on. responding lights cannot come on. OR: activate and deactivate the daytime lights using the Easy Connect system Daytime running lights ›››  page 21.

Daytime running lights are signalling devices Automatic control of the dipped beam in for improving road safety. The lights are built combination with the daytime running lights into the headlights and come on each time the ignition is turned on if the light switch is If the dipped beam control and the daytime running lights are activated at the same in position 0 or  ››› Fig. 129. It is automat- Fig. 131 Turn signal and main beam lever. ically switched off when the side lights are time, the dipped beams and the instrument turned on. panel lighting will automatically come on as The turn signal and main beam lever also op- required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and erates the parking lights and the headlight the daytime running lights will switch off. Switching the daytime driving lights on flasher. When the automatic dipped beam control ● Remove the key from the ignition, move the switches off the dipped beams (e.g. when Right and left-hand  turn signal  turn signal lever upward (right turn signal), coming out of a tunnel), the daytime running press it back to flash position and hold it lights come back on. ● Move the lever ››› Fig. 131 up 1 or down there. 2 . ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, WARNING ● Keep the lever held down at the point of re- holding it in this position for 3 seconds. The rear lights do not come on with the day- sistance for the turn signals to flash for as Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime time driving light. A vehicle which does not long as you hold the lever, e.g. when chang- running light is now activated and the corre- have the rear lights on may not be visible to ing lanes. sponding lights can come on. other drivers in the darkness, if it is raining or in conditions of poor visibility.

118 Lights and visibility

Convenience turn signals CAUTION If the light switch is in position , the symbol  located next to the light switch will il- For the convenience turn signals, move the Never use the main beam headlights or the lever as far as possible upwards or down- luminate. If the light illuminates automatical- headlight flasher if they could dazzle other ly, symbol  located next to the light switch wards and release the lever. The turn signal drivers. will flash three times. will also illuminate. Technical data Technical The convenience turn signals are activated Note Automatic headlights in case of rain and deactivated in the Easy Connect system ● If the convenience turn signals are operat- If the light switch is in position  and is via the  key and the Setup function button ing (three flashes) and the other convenience connected to the automatic wipe in case of ››› page 99. turn signals are switched on, the active part rain for more than 10 seconds or wipe (posi-

stops flashing and only flashes once in the Advice In vehicles that do not have the correspond- tion 2 or 3 ) for longer than 15 seconds, new part selected. ing menu, this function can be deactivated in ››› page 125 then the side lights and head- a specialised workshop. ● The turn signals only work when the igni- lights will automatically switch on. tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-   The light automatically switches off if more Main beams  ing lamp or flashes in the general instrument panel. than 4 minutes have elapsed and the auto- ● Switch on the dipped beam page 117. ››› ● The turn signals switch off automatically matic wipe or wipe (position 2 or 3 ) have not been switched on. ● Press the lever ››› Fig. 131 forward in the di- when the steering wheel is returned to the Operation rection indicated by arrow 3 . straight-ahead position. CAUTION ● Pull the lever back to its original position in ● If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control the direction indicated by arrow 4 to switch lamp flashes at double speed. Do not cover the windscreen light sensor with the main beam off. stickers or similar objects; this could impair operation. Headlight flasher  Automatic dipped beam control  Emergencies ● Pull the lever ››› Fig. 131 towards the steering wheel (point of resistance) in the direc- If the light switch is in this position  tion indicated by arrow 4 . ››› Fig. 129, the side lights, headlights and the number plate lights will turn on or off au- Parking lights  tomatically. Safety ● Instructions for use ››› page 121. The light is adjusted according to the data re- corded by the light sensor that is installed between the windscreen and the inside rear view mirror.

119 Operation

Front fog lights* Front fog lights with cornering func- Rear fog light tion* Switching on the rear fog light 3 Not valid for vehicles fitted with Full-LED lights – First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 Front fog lights with cornering function pro- ››› page 120 to position ,  or . vide better lighting of the area around the car when driving through a corner or parking, – Pull on the light switch to position 2 . etc. If the vehicle is not equipped with front fog lights ››› page 120, the rear fog light is Front fog lights with cornering function switched on by turning the switch to position switch on depending on how far you turn the  or  and pulling it to position 2 . This steering wheel or whether or not the turn sig- type of switch only has one position. Fig. 132 Instrument panel: light switch. nals1) are switched on, if the following conditions are met: The  ››› page 98 warning lamp lights up on Switching on front fog lights ● The vehicle is stationary, the ignition is the general instrument panel if the rear fog – First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 to po- switched on or you are moving at a speed of lights are switched on. sition ,  or . less than 40 km/h (25 mph); If you are towing a trailer or caravan equip- – Pull on the light switch to position 1 . ● The daytime driving light is switched off ped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a ● The dipped beam is switched on factory-fitted towing bracket or one installed The  warning lamp lights up on the general using parts from the original SEAT parts ● instrument panel if the front fog lights are The fog lights are switched off catalogue, only the rear fog light on the trail- switched on. ● Reverse gear is not engaged er or caravan will light up.

1) In the event of a conflict between both functions, i.e. if you turn the steering wheel to the left while the right-hand turn signal is on, the turn signals will take priority. 120 Lights and visibility

Function “Coming Home”/“Leaving The lights is switched off when all the doors at the same time as the turn signals when Home”* and the boot lid are closed. the hazard warning lights are switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when If a door or the boot lid remains open, the the ignition is switched off. This function makes it possible, under poor light will switch off after 60 seconds. visibility conditions, to automatically turn on The hazard warning lights come on automati- the lights for a brief period of time after the data Technical “Leaving Home” function cally in the event of an accident in which an vehicle has been parked or when approach- airbag is triggered. ing the vehicle. The light is automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con- Note The function is automatically turned on if the trol. Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn following conditions are met: Advice The light is switched off after 10 seconds or other road users, for example: ● The light switch is in position  when the vehicle is locked. ● When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam ››› page 119. ● if the vehicle has a technical fault or you ● The visibility around the vehicle is reduced. Hazard warning lights switch are involved in an emergency situation. ● The ignition is switched off.

To turn on this function, switch on the head- Operation light flasher prior to exiting the vehicle. Parking lights* The light is adjusted according to the data re- Parking lights  corded by the light sensor that is installed – Switch the ignition off. between the windscreen and the inside rear view mirror. – Move the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 131 ››› page 118 up or down to turn on the right The function automatically turns on the side or left-hand parking lights respectively. Emergencies lights and headlights, the lighting for the entry area on the exterior mirrors and the num- Parking light on both sides ber plate light. Fig. 133 Instrument panel: switch for hazard warning lights. – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129  “Coming Home” function ››› page 117 to position  and engage the – Press the button  ››› Fig. 133 to switch steering lock. » Safety The light is automatically switched on when the hazard warning lights on or off. the driver door is opened (for 60 seconds after the ignition is switched off). The warning lamps on the instrument panel and the warning lamp on the switch will flash 121 Operation

Note Note ● The parking lights  can only be activated “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If with the ignition disconnected. you are planning a long stay in a country that ● The parking light will not come on automat- drives on the other side, you should take the ically after switching off the ignition if the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to left- or right-hand turn signal is left on. change the headlights.

Adjusting the headlights Interior lights Fig. 135 Interior lighting – version 2. The light beam of the dipped beam lights is Interior lighting asymmetric: the side of the road on which Read the additional information carefully you are driving is lit more intensely. ›››  page 20

When a car that is manufactured in a country Where the courtesy light is on (switch A that drives on the right travels to a country ››› Fig. 134 in position ), the light will come that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- on if: mally necessary to cover part of the headlight ● the vehicle is unlocked, bulbs with stickers or to change the adjustment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth- ● one of the doors is opened, er drivers. ● The key is removed from the ignition In such cases, the regulations specify certain When the courtesy light is on (switch A in light values that must be complied with for Fig. 134 Interior lighting – version 1. position ), the light will switch off if: designated points of the light distribution. This is known as “Tourist light”. ● the vehicle is locked, ● the ignition is switched on, The light distribution of the halogen and full- LED headlights of the SEAT Toledo allows the ● 30 seconds after all of the doors have been specific “tourist light” values to be met with- closed out the need for stickers or changes in the If a door is left open or if switch A is in the settings.  position, the interior lighting switches off after about 10 minutes to prevent the battery from running flat.

122 Lights and visibility

Rear interior light Glove box light – Switch the heated rear window on or off by pressing the button  ››› Fig. 137, the The light will come on automatically when warning lamp in the button will come on or the glove compartment is opened. The light go off respectively. will go out when the glove compartment is The heated rear window only works when the closed. data Technical engine is running. After approximately 7 minutes, the heating Luggage compartment light device of the rear window switches off automatically.

The light switches on automatically when the Advice boot is open and switches off automatically For the sake of the environment Fig. 136 Rear interior light. 10 minutes after the boot lid has been The heated rear window should be switched opened. Press the button ››› Fig. 136 to switch the off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel lighting on or off. ››› page 162. Visibility Operation Interior lights / ambient light* Note Heated rear window In the event of a drop in voltage in the on- The lighting in the central console area, the board systems, the heated rear window door handles, the storage pockets in the switches off automatically to ensure enough front doors, the footwell area and the instru- power to control the engine ››› page 214, Au- ment panel trim will switch on fully when the tomatic disconnection of electrical equipment. doors are opened and will decrease in inten- Emergencies sity while driving with the dipped beam headlights on. The intensity of the ambient light* can be adjusted using the menu Easy Connect >

Lighting settings > Vehicle inte- Safety rior lighting ›››  page 21. Fig. 137 Heated rear window switch.

123 Operation

Sun visors The front passenger sun visor includes a van- WARNING ity mirror B with a cover. The cover is opened by sliding it in the direction indicated ● Make sure the blades ›››  page 53 are in perfect condition for good visibility and safe by arrow 3 ››› Fig. 139. driving. WARNING ● In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed Do not turn sun visors with attached objects the windscreen with the heating and ventila- such as ball-pens, etc. toward the head pro- tion system. The windscreen washer fluid tection airbag triggering zone on the side could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and windows. The head protection airbags could obscure your view of the road. injure occupants if triggered.

Fig. 138 Driver's sun visor. CAUTION ● During winter, always check that the wind- Windscreen wipers and windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to the screen washers glass before each trip or before switching on the ignition. If you switch on the windscreen wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to Introduction the glass, this could damage both the wiper blades and the wiper motor. The windscreen wipers and windscreen ● If the ignition is switched off when the washers only work when the ignition is windscreen wipers are on, they will start op- switched on. erating in the same mode when the ignition The speed of the automatic wipe in case of is switched back on. The wiper blades may be Fig. 139 Front passenger's sun visor. rain is automatically adjusted according to frozen to the glass at low temperatures when the intensity of the rainfall. the ignition is switched off. The sun visors for the driver and the front ● Carefully separate the frozen wipers from The rear window is wiped once if the wind- passenger can be pulled out of their central the windscreen or rear window. screen wipers are switched on and reverse supports and turned towards the doors in the ● gear is engaged. Remove snow and ice from the wipers be- direction of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 138 and 2 fore starting your journey. ››› Fig. 139 respectively. Fill the windscreen washer fluid ››› page 210. ● Careless handling could lead to the wiper The strip A is to store small objects such as arms damaging the windscreen. notepaper, etc.

124 Lights and visibility

● For safety reasons, the wiper blades should Short wipe – Release the lever. The washer will stop and be changed once or twice a year. They can be – Give the windscreen a brief wipe by moving the windscreen wipers will keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreen purchased at a SEAT Authorised Service. the lever down to position 4 ››› Fig. 140. ● The ignition cannot be switched on while washer operating time). the windscreen wiper arms are in a raised po- Wipe intervals/automatic wipe in case of rain sition. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers rain sensor* Rear window wiper* data Technical would return to their original position and – Press the lever forward to position 6 could damage the paintwork on the bonnet. – Push the lever up to position 1 ››› Fig. 140. ››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper will run every 6 seconds. Note – With switch A , adjust the wipe interval or

rain sensor sensitivity. Advice Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can be Automatic rear window wash and wipe* soiled with remains of wax solutions from car Switch A has 4 positions. – Press the lever fully forward to position 7 washes ››› page 194. The rain sensor* is part of the intermittent ››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper and ● On vehicles equipped with windscreen wipe function. washer switch on at the same time. washer jets, these are heated once the en- – Release the lever. The rear window washer gine is running. The rain sensor* controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending will stop and the rear window wipers will on the amount of rain. keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on Operation the jet operating time). When released, the Operating windscreen wipers and lever remains in position 6 . washers Slow wipe – Push the lever up to position 2 Switching off the wipers ››› Fig. 140. – Move the lever to position 0 ››› Fig. 140.

Continuous wipe Emergencies WARNING – Push the lever up to position 3 The rain sensor may not detect enough rain ››› Fig. 140. to switch on the wipers. Automatic windscreen wash and wipe ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- Safety – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, bility. » position 5 ››› Fig. 140, and the windscreen washer and wipers are switched on. Fig. 140 Window wiper lever.

125 Operation

Note Mirrors Note Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front ● Exterior mirrors are only heated when the of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor Rear view mirror with manual anti- engine is running. disruption or faults. dazzle device ● Do not touch the exterior mirrors when the heating system is running. Basic settings ● If the electrical adjustment should ever fail Headlight washers* – Push the lever at the bottom of the mirror to operate, the rear vision mirrors can be ad- forward. justed by hand by pressing the edge of the The headlight washers operate briefly if the mirror glass. dipped headlights or headlights are on and Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting ● Visit the technical service in the event of a the lever is moved to position 5 ››› Fig. 140. fault in the electrical rear vision mirror ad- – Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to- The headlight washer system also operates justment system. wards you. every 10 windscreen wash cycles. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the headlights at regular intervals, for instance Exterior mirrors when filling the fuel tank. Please observe the following indications ››› page 196, Head- Read the additional information carefully lights. ›››  page 13 To ensure the system works properly in win- Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear ter, keep the nozzle holders free of snow and view mirrors for a good rear visibility. remove any ice with a de-icer spray. WARNING CAUTION ● Convex (wide-angle) rear vision mirrors give Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk of a larger field of vision. However, they make damage to the system! objects appear smaller and further away than they really are. For this reason, you should not rely on these rear vision mirrors for judg- ing the distance of vehicle behind. ● If possible, use the interior rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

126 Seats and head restraints

Seats and head restraints ● The backrests must not be reclined too far clutch, brake or accelerator from being press- back while driving. This could limit the effect ed. Adjusting seats and head re- of the seat belts and the airbag system. Risk ● Do not place any items on the front passen- of injury! ger seat other than those allowed (e.g. child straints ● Never transport more than the permitted seat). Risk of accident! amount of people in your vehicle. data Technical Introduction ● Every occupant in the vehicle must properly Note fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to Read the additional information carefully his or her seat. Children must be protected After a certain time, the backrest angle ad- ›››  page 11 with an appropriate child restraint system justment mechanism may gain a certain

››› page 72, Transporting children safely. amount of play. Advice Set the driver seat in such a way that the ● pedals can be fully depressed with your legs The front seats, head restraints and seat belts must always be adjusted to the size of slightly bent. the vehicle occupant to provide you and your Set the driver seat backrest so that you can passengers with the greatest possible protec- reach the upper point of the steering wheel tion. with your arms slightly bent. ● Your feet should remain in the footwell

while the vehicle is moving; never rest them Operation The correct seat position is very important on the dash panel, on the window or on the for: seat! This also applies to passengers. An in- ● reaching all of the controls safely and correct sitting position exposes you to an in- quickly, creased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- ● a relaxed posture that will not produce fati- gered, you could sustain severe injuries due gue, to an incorrect sitting position! Emergencies ● maximum protection from the seat belts ● It is important for the driver and front pas- and airbag system senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. Fail- WARNING ure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of ●

Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi- Safety fatal injury if triggered! cle is stationary. Risk of accident! ● Objects must not be placed in the footwell, ● Be careful when adjusting the front seats! as they could move to the area of the pedals Careless and uncontrolled adjustment can in the event of a braking manoeuvre or cause injuries. change of direction. This would prevent the 127 Operation

head restraints Fitting and removing head restraints on front The head restraint must be adjusted in line seats with the height of users. Correct adjustment – Push the head restraint up as far as it will of the head restraint, together with the seat go. belts, ensure effective passenger protection ››› page 56. – Press catch 1 ››› Fig. 141 and remove the head restraint. WARNING – To refit, insert the head restraint into the ● Badly adjusted head restraints increase the holes in the backrest, pushing it down until risk of injuries in the event of an accident. it engages. ● Never drive with the head restraints removed. Risk of injuries! Fitting and removing head restraints on rear ● If the seats are in use, never drive with the Fig. 141 Front head restraint: adjust or re- seats rear head restraints in their out-of-use posi- move. To remove the head restraint, the correspond- tion. ing backrest must be partially folded forward. – Unlock the backrest ››› page 130 – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- Seat functions rives to the top. Heated front seats* – Press button 1 ››› Fig. 142, while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 ››› Fig. 142 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head restraint.

Fig. 142 Rear centre head restraint: release – To refit, insert the head restraint into the point. holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it engages. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 12 For maximum head restraint protection, adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge Head restraints cannot be moved up or down is at the same level as the top of your head. or removed on sports seats. Fig. 143 Heated front seats.

128 Seats and head restraints

The cushion and backrest of the front seats bag, etc. This could lead to a fault in the seat Armrest on front seats with inner stor- can be heated electrically. heating elements. age* Press the  or  ››› Fig. 143 button to switch ● Do not clean the seats with anything damp on and adjust the heated front seats. ››› page 198.

Press once to connect the heating at maxi- data Technical mum force. Note Press the button again to reduce the force of ● Only connect the heated seats when the the heating and switch it off. The force is indi- engine is running. This provides considerable savings on the battery capacity. cated by the number of warning lamps lit on the button. ● In the event of a drop in voltage in the on- Advice board systems, the heated seats switch off WARNING automatically to ensure enough power to control the engine ››› page 214, Automatic dis- Do not use the heated seat if your perception connection of electrical equipment. of pain and/or temperature or that of your passenger is limited, e.g. due to medication, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes). It could cause burns on the back, buttocks and Operation legs that are difficult to heal. If you still want to use the heated seat, take frequent breaks on long journeys so that the body can recover from the trip. Ask your doctor about your particular situation.

CAUTION Emergencies ● To avoid damaging the heating elements, do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pres- Fig. 144 Armrest/Opening and closing the sure at a single point to the seat cushion or storage compartment. backrest. ● Do not use the heated seats if nobody is Adjusting armrest height Safety sitting on them or if there are items attached – Lift the armrest as far as it will go and then to or lying on them, such as a child seat or a fold it downward. »

129 Operation

– Raise the armrest until it engages in one of Folding down the backrest such a way that they cannot be soiled or the 5 positions. damaged. – Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole A Opening storage compartment ››› Fig. 146 located on the corresponding – Press the button located on the front of the side of the vehicle – safety position. armrest ››› Fig. 144 - . – Press the lock button B to unlock the – Lift the storage compartment lid ››› Fig. 144 backrest and fold it forward. - . Returning to the initial position – Where the head restraint has been re- Armrest on rear seats moved, insert it into the backrest when partially raised. – Push the backrest backwards to its original position until the lock button engages – check that it is locked by pulling on the backrest ››› . – Make sure the red protruding part C is not visible.

WARNING Fig. 146 Unlocking the backrest. ● Fig. 145 Rear seats: armrest. Once the backrests have been lifted, the seat belts and their buckles must be in their Folding The armrest can be folded away for greater initial position – ready for use. comfort using the handle ››› Fig. 145. – Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po- ● The backrests must be safely locked to en- sition of the front seats so that the rear sure any items in the boot cannot move seats are not damaged. When the front around the interior of the vehicle in the event seats are adjusted to the rear position, of a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of inju- their head restraints should be removed ries! before folding the backrests on the rear ● Make sure the rear backrests are correctly seats. Store the removed head restraints in locked. Only then will the three-point automatic seat belt on the rear central seat work correctly. 130 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION Transport and practical Opening and closing passenger side glove compartment Take care when handling the rear backrests equipment so as not to damage the seat belts. The seat – Pull the catch on the lid in the direction in- belt must never be left behind the lifted back- dicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 147 and open rest. Practical equipment the lid. Technical data Technical – Close the lid and push it until it engages. Passenger side storage compartment Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD player is located in the glove compartment. Separate operating instructions are enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding In- Advice struction Manual.

Glove compartment cooling* Open or close the air outlet by turning the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 148.

If the air outlet is open and the air condition- Operation Fig. 147 Instrument panel: passenger side ing is on, the cooled air will be released into glove compartment. the glove compartment. If the air outlet is open and the air conditioning is off, outdoor air (not conditioned) will be released into the glove compartment.

The air outlet should be closed if the air con- Emergencies ditioning is being used in heating mode or where glove compartment cooling is not in use.

WARNING Safety ● For safety reasons, all storage compart- Fig. 148 Storage: cooling control. ments must be closed while the vehicle is moving. »

131 Operation

● Never place any objects on the instrument WARNING Drink holder in the centre console panel. These objects could be flown around The compartment is solely designed to store the interior while the vehicle is moving (on the reflective vest and no other objects. Ob- accelerating or turning) and distract you. Risk jects falling out of the storage compartment of accident! could limit or prevent use of the pedals. ● Make sure objects remain in the centre console or other compartments while the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, this could prevent you CAUTION from braking, changing gear or accelerating. The compartment is solely designed to store Risk of accident! the reflective vest and no other objects, since there is a risk of damaging the storage com- Note partment. The glove compartment can hold a bottle no larger than 1 litre. Storage pocket under the front seats

There is a storage pocket on the rear part of Storage compartment for reflective the backrest of the front seats. vest These pockets are designed to hold maps, magazines, etc.

WARNING Fig. 150 Centre console: drink holder Do not place heavy objects in the pockets. Risk of injury! A Front drink holder in the centre console B Rear drink holder in the centre console CAUTION Do not place overly large objects in the pock- WARNING ets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges. ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. Risk of damage to the pockets and the up- Fig. 149 Driver's seat: storage compartment They could spill while the vehicle is moving. holstery. Risk of scalding! There is a compartment below the driver seat ››› Fig. 149 to store the reflective vests.

132 Transport and practical equipment

● Do not use cups or glasses made of fragile Cigarette lighter* moved. Therefore, never leave children unsu- materials (e.g. glass or china). These could pervised in the vehicle. cause injury in the event of an accident. Note CAUTION

● The 12 V power socket of the cigarette data Technical Avoid putting open drinks containers in the lighter can also be used as a power source for drink holder while the vehicle is moving. electrical appliances ››› page 134, 12V Power They could spill (e.g. on braking) and cause socket. damage to the electrical equipment or the ● Additional information ››› page 192, Acces- seat covers.

sories and modifications to the vehicle. Advice

Fig. 152 Centre console: lighter Drink holder in rear seat armrest The cigarette lighter is located at the front of the centre console ››› Fig. 152.

Using the cigarette lighter Operation – Press the cigarette lighter knob ››› Fig. 152. – Wait for the lighter to spring out. – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil immediately. – Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket. Emergencies Fig. 151 Rear seats armrest: drink holder WARNING Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder. ● Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Use the detachable parts A and B Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious

››› Fig. 151 to change the size of the holes. Safety injuries. – Remove part A or B in the direction indi- ● The cigarette lighter also works when the cated by the arrow and replace in the re- ignition is off and when the ignition key is required position in the drink holder.

133 Operation

Ashtrays* WARNING Additional information ››› page 192, Acces- sories and modifications to the vehicle. Never put flammable materials in the ashtray. Risk of fire! WARNING ● Improper use of the sockets or electrical CAUTION appliances can cause a fire and lead to burns Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid when and other serious injuries. removing it. Risk of breaking the lid. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The 12 V power socket is also func- tional when the ignition is switched off and 12V Power socket the key is removed. ● Should the connected appliance overheat, immediately switch it off and disconnect it from the socket.

CAUTION ● The 12 V power socket can only be used to power appliances with a power rating of up to 120 watts. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted power, as this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical installation. Fig. 153 Centre console: front ashtray/rear Fig. 154 Centre console: 12 V power socket. ashtray. ● With the engine switched off, however, the The 12 V power socket is located at the front vehicle battery will drain. Risk of discharging Removing the ashtray of the centre console ››› Fig. 154. the battery! ● Only use suitable plugs so as not to dam- – Pull the ashtray ››› Fig. 153 upwards to re- age the power socket. move. Using the power socket ● – Open the cover or remove the cigarette Only use appliances that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in compli- Inserting the ashtray lighter concealing the socket. ance with current regulations. – Push the ashtray down. – Insert the plug of the electrical appliance ● Before switching the ignition on or off, un- into the socket. plug the appliances from the power socket to

134 Transport and practical equipment

protect them from any damage caused by Storage compartment for glasses* Coat hooks* fluctuations in voltage. The coat hooks are located on the B-pillars ● Follow the instructions for use of connected appliances! and on the handles on the interior lining above each rear door. Technical data Technical WARNING Multimedia compartment ● Make sure that any items of clothing hang- ing from the coat hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear.

● Only use the coat hooks for light items of Advice clothing and make sure that there are no Fig. 156 Close-up of roof panel: storage com- heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. partment for eyeglasses. ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the – Press the compartment lid and it will drop clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags. down ››› Fig. 156. Operation WARNING CAUTION Fig. 155 Front centre console: multimedia The side hooks support a maximum load of 2 compartment. This compartment must only remain open when removing or replacing glasses. kg. The multimedia compartment is in the storage compartment of the front centre console CAUTION ››› Fig. 155. ● Do not place heat-sensitive objects in the Emergencies The compartment can be used to hold mobile compartment as they could be damaged. phones, mp3 players or similar devices. ● The side compartment supports a maximum load of 0.25 kg. WARNING

Never use the multimedia compartment as an Safety ashtray or to store flammable materials. Risk of fire!

135 Operation

Front seat backrest net pockets Compartments in the centre console There is a bottle carrier in part B ››› Fig. 159 of the storage compartment in the front door.

WARNING Only use part A ››› Fig. 159 of the compartment in the front door to store objects that do not protrude from it so as not obstruct the deployment area of the side airbags.

Storage compartment in the luggage

Fig. 157 Front seats backrests: net pockets. Fig. 158 Centre console: storage compart- compartment* ment There are net pockets on the inside part of the front seats backrests ››› Fig. 157. Open storage compartment in centre console ››› Fig. 158. These pockets are designed to hold lightweight objects such as a mobile phone or an mp3 player. Storage compartment in front door WARNING ● Do not exceed the maximum load that the net pockets can support. Heavy objects cannot be safely secured. Risk of injuries! Fig. 160 Luggage compartment: storage compartment CAUTION The lid from the side storage compartment ● The net pockets support a maximum load of can be removed to increase the size of the 150 g. boot. ● Do not place overly large objects in the – Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it out pockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp in the direction indicated by the arrow edges. Risk of damage to the pockets. Fig. 159 Storage compartment in door trim. ››› Fig. 160.

136 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- Note partment and secure them on the fastening ● The compartments are designed to hold ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce rings. small objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg. fogging of the windows. Used air escapes ● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- ● Make sure you do not damage the storage through ventilation slits in the side trim of jects. compartment or the boot trim when using the the luggage compartment. Ensure that the Technical data Technical compartment. ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, ventilation slots are never covered. loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in- ing rings are commercially available. creased risk of injury will be further increased Storing objects if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-

bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out- Advice ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury. Fastening rings* Loading the luggage compartment ● Please note that the centre of gravity may There can be four fastening rings in the lug- shift when transporting heavy objects; this All luggage and other loose objects must be gage compartment for fastening luggage and safely secured in the luggage compartment. may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust other objects. Unsecured objects which shift back and forth your speed and driving style accordingly, to – Always use suitable and undamaged straps could impair the driving safety or driving avoid accidents. to secure luggage and other objects to the Operation characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug- centre of gravity. allowed maximum weight. If said weights are gage compartment on page 137. exceeded, the driving characteristics of the – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- – Pull up the fastening rings to attach the compartment. juries and damage to the vehicle. straps. – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- During a collision or an accident, even small

ble in the luggage compartment. Emergencies cially when the rear lid is open. Children and light objects can build up so much ener- could climb into the luggage compartment, – Place the heavy objects first. gy that they can cause very severe injuries. closing the door behind them; they will be The amount of kinetic “energy” depends on – Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings trapped and run the risk of death. the speed of the vehicle and the weight of ››› page 137. ● Never allow children to play in or around the object. The most significant factor, how- the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and

ever, is the speed of the vehicle. Safety WARNING rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are ● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug- Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying no adults or children in the vehicle. gage compartment could cause serious inju- unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- ries. lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this » 137 Operation

object generates a force corresponding to 20 During an accident, even small and light ob- ● Securing the load to the rings using unsuit- times its weight. That means that the effec- jects can have so much kinetic energy that able or damaged straps could lead to injuries tive weight of the object increases to approxi- they can cause very severe injuries. The in the event of an accident or sudden braking mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of amount of kinetic energy depends on the manoeuvre. Secure suitable straps safely to the injuries which might be sustained if this speed of the vehicle and the weight of the the rings to ensure this does not happen. “object” strikes an occupant as it flies object. However, the speed of the vehicle is ● Position the load so it cannot move forward through the interior of the vehicle. This in- the most important factor. during a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of creased risk of injury will be further increased Example: An unsecured object weighing 4.5 injuries! if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- kg produces energy corresponding to 20 ● If transporting sharp or dangerous objects bag. times its weight in a frontal collision at 50 in the space provided when the rear seats are km/h (31 mph). This means that its weight folded, ensure the safety of the occupant of WARNING reaches around 90 kg. You can imagine the the remaining rear seat ››› page 58. ● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se- severity of the injuries that might be sus- ● If the rear seat located alongside a folded cured to the fastening rings with inappropri- tained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant seat is occupied, ensure safety, for example, ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries as it flies through the vehicle interior. by placing the load so that it stops the seat could result in the event of braking manoeu- from folding backward in the event of being vres or accidents. hit from behind. WARNING ● Never secure a child seat on the fastening ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- ● Store objects in the luggage compartment rings. closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the and secure to the fastening points. interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! ● In an accident or sudden manoeuvre, loose ● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al- objects in the interior can be flung forward lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident! Luggage compartment and possibly injure vehicle occupants or others. This risk is even greater if the flying ob- ● Never transport passengers in the luggage jects hit a triggering airbag. In this case, any compartment! Introduction rebounding objects could injure vehicle occupants. Risk of fatal injuries! Please observe the following points to ensure CAUTION ● the vehicle handles well at all times: Take into account that transporting heavy Make sure sharp objects stored in the boot objects changes the centre of gravity that cannot not damage the rear window heating – Distribute the load as evenly as possible. could also cause changes in vehicle handling. filaments. Risk of accident! Therefore, always adjust – Place heavy objects as far forward in the your speed and driving style to suit these cir- luggage compartment as possible. cumstances. – Secure luggage using the fastening rings or retaining net ››› page 139. 138 Transport and practical equipment

Note CAUTION Retaining nets* Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit the The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN load ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres. (350 kg).

Note data Technical Category N1 vehicles The front ring B is below the folding backrest of the rear seats ››› Fig. 161. Category N1 vehicles with no protection grille must use a retaining set compliant with Standard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure the Advice load. Hook* Fig. 163 Retaining nets.

Retaining elements* Operation

Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: hook. Fig. 164 Retaining nets. There are hooks on both sides of the boot to Emergencies secure light items of luggage such as bags, Fig. 161 Luggage compartment: retaining el- Example of securing retaining nets etc. ››› Fig. 162. ements. ››› Fig. 163 and ››› Fig. 164. A Sideways bag The following retaining elements are fitted in CAUTION the boot ››› Fig. 161: The side hooks support a maximum load of B Ground net Safety 7.5 kg. C Lengthways bag A Rings to secure the load and the retain- » ing nets. B Rings used solely for the retaining nets. 139 Operation

WARNING WARNING Do not exceed the maximum load that the Do not place objects on the rear shelf that nets can support. Heavy objects cannot be could endanger the vehicle occupants in case safely secured. Risk of injury! of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident. CAUTION CAUTION ● The retaining nets support a maximum load of 1.5 kg. ● The rear shelf supports a maximum load of ● Do not place any item with sharp edges in 1 kg. the net. Risk of damaging the net! Fig. 166 Remove the shelf. ● If handled incorrectly, the tray could bend on closing the rear lid and become damaged The shelf can be removed if a large load is to or damage the trim. Follow the instructions be transported. below: Rear shelf – The shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 166 must be Removing the shelf securely in place in the trim supports 2 . – Remove the straps from the shelf 1 – The size of the load must not exceed the ››› Fig. 165. height of the shelf. – Remove the shelf from its housing 2 by – When open, the shelf must not be bent knocking it gently from underneath be- against the shelf seal. tween the supports. – There must be no objects in the space between the open shelf and the backrest of Fitting the shelf the rear seat. – Place the shelf on the side supports on the Note Fig. 165 Remove the shelf. trim. The shelf will lift when the rear lid is opened. – Adjust the shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 166 to fit the supports 2 in the trim. – Fit into place by knocking the top of the shelf gently between the supports. – Attach the straps 1 to the tray.

140 Transport and practical equipment

Roof rack* ● Remember that the rear lid must not hit the Attachment points roof load. Introduction ● The total height of the vehicle increases according to the roof load. Compare the height WARNING of the vehicle with the heights of bridges or other underpasses, for example, the height data Technical ● The load on the roof carrier must be proper- of the garage door. ly secured. Risk of accident! ● Do not forget to remove the roof carrier be- ● Always secure the load using retaining fore entering an automatic carwash. straps that are in good condition. ● Take into account that the load must not ● Distribute the load evenly. damage the aerial located on the roof. Advice ● When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in normal vehicle be- For the sake of the environment haviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or increased wind resistance must be taken If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel con- into account. Risk of accident! For this rea- sumption will also increase. son, speed and driving style must be adjus-

ted for the situation. Operation ● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking. ● Adjust your driving style to suit visibility, the weather and road and traffic conditions. ● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. Risk of accident! Fig. 167 Basic roof carrier attachment points.

Location of the basic roof carrier attachment Emergencies CAUTION points ››› Fig. 167: ● Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers. A Rear attachment points ● Where roof carriers from other systems are B Front attachment points used or where they are not fitted properly,

any damage caused to the vehicle will not be Install and remove following the instructions Safety covered by the warranty. Therefore, carefully given. » follow the Instruction Manual for installation of the roof carrier.

141 Operation

CAUTION Air conditioning make sure you familiarise yourself with the correct use of heating and ventilation, win- Follow the instructions given in the manual. Heating and air conditioning dow demisting and defrosting and cooling. ● Never use the air recirculation system for too long, as it prevents fresh air from enter- Roof load General notes ing the vehicle and used air can cause tiredness, reduce your attention span and cause The maximum permissible roof load (includ- The power of the heating depends on the the windows to mist over. This increases the ing the support system) of 75 kg and the to- temperature of the coolant. Therefore, maxi- risk of an accident. Switch off the air recircu- tal authorised weight of the vehicle must not mum power is only obtained when the en- lation system as soon as the windows begin be exceeded. gine has reached operating temperature. to mist over. It will not be possible to carry the full maxi- The temperature and humidity of the air in- mum load if the roof carrier you are using is side the vehicle decrease when the cooling WARNING rated for a load which is less than this figure. system is turned on. This therefore increases Do not switch off Climatronic for longer than In this case, you can only load the roof carrier the comfort of all vehicle occupants when necessary. to the maximum load permitted in your in- outside temperatures and humidity are high. ● Switch Climatronic back on as soon as the stallation manual. It also helps prevent the windows from mist- windows begin to mist over. ing over during cold periods of the year.

The air recirculation system can be switched Note on temporarily to increase the cooling effect. ● Used air escapes through ventilation slots Keep the air intake slots in front of the wind- in the rear of the luggage compartment. screen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensure ● Smoking is not recommended while the air unimpaired heating and cooling. recirculation system is in use, as the smoke When the air conditioning is on, condensa- drawn from the interior of the vehicle settles in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys- tion can drip from the evaporator in the air tem. This causes a persistent, unpleasant cooling system and form a pool underneath smell while the system is running that is the vehicle. This is normal and does not indi- time-consuming and expensive (evaporator cate a leak! replacement) to eliminate. ● To guarantee proper operation, never cover WARNING the air outlets in the luggage compartment. ● All windows must be clear of ice, snow and condensation for driving safety. Therefore, 142 Air conditioning

Economic use of the air-conditioning If the interior temperature can be reached the system is faulty. This may be due to one system without switching on the air conditioning, the of the following reasons: fresh air mode should be used. ● One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse When the air conditioning is switched on, the and replace if necessary ››› page 80. For the sake of the environment compressor consumes engine power and has ● The air conditioning compressor has influence on fuel consumption. Saving fuel reduces emissions. switched off temporarily because of in- data Technical If the vehicle interior has overheated due to creased engine coolant temperature excessive solar radiation, it is best to open ››› page 97. the windows or doors to allow the hot air to Faults escape. If you cannot repair the fault yourself or where cooling power continues to drop, Advice While in motion, the air conditioning should If the air conditioning does not work at out- switch off the system. Contact a specialised not be switched on if the windows are open. side temperatures above +5°C (+41°F) then service.

Air vents Operation Emergencies

Fig. 168 Air vents Safety

Opening air vents 3 and 4 – Turn the vertical circular control upwards. »

143 Operation

Closing air vents 3 and 4 Heating and fresh air – Press button 1 ››› in Air recirculation  – Turn the vertical circular control down- on page 145 to close the fresh air vent. wards. Operation Air distribution selection Changing the direction of air delivery from – Turn rotary control C ››› Fig. 169 to select air vents 3 and 4 the air vents ››› page 143, Air vents you – The air circulation height can be varied by wish to activate. changing the position of the sliding adjust- All controls, except control B ››› Fig. 169, er upwards or downwards ››› Fig. 168. can be set to any intermediate position. – The air circulation direction can be varied Leave the blower activated at all times to pre- by changing the position of the sliding ad- vent the windows from misting over. juster to the right or to the left.

The flow of air from the vents is controlled us- Note ing control C ››› Fig. 169. Vents 3 ››› Fig. 168 Fig. 169 Heating: controls. If the system is set so that all of the air is and 4 can be opened and closed individually. used to defrost the windows, no air is sup- Read the additional information carefully plied to the footwell area. This could limit Depending on the position of the adjusters  page 38 heating comfort. and on the weather, open vents can provide ››› air which is either heated, unheated or cooled. Temperature selection  – Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 169 clockwise Air recirculation to increase the temperature. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, – Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re- e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in duce the temperature. queuing traffic, from entering the interior. If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 169 is in the Blower selection thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- – Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 169 to posi- ways be open (button light off). tion 1 to 4 to switch the blower on. If the rotary switch C is switched from any – Turn rotary control B to position 0 to position to the thaw position, recirculation switch the blower off. will be automatically deactivated.

144 Air conditioning

Connecting the recirculation ● The outside temperature is above +2°C Read the additional information carefully In any position of rotary switch C except (+36°F), ›››  page 37 thaw: ● The blower control is in position 1–4. Temperature selection ● Press button 1 , the switch's When the cooling system is on and under cer- ››› Fig. 169 – Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 170 clockwise lamp will light up, indicating that air recircu- tain conditions, air can be blown from the to increase the temperature. data Technical lation inside the vehicle has been activated. vents at a temperature of approximately +5°C (+41°F). In the event of prolonged, irregular – Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re- Disconnecting the recirculation distribution of the air flow from the outlets duce the temperature. and significant differences in temperature, In any position of rotary switch C except

e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people Blower selection Advice thaw: may catch cold. – Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 170 to posi- ● Press button 1 again and the button's tion 1 to 4 to switch the blower on. lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula- Note – Turn rotary control B to position 0 to tion from the outside has been activated. A visit to the specialised service once a year switch the blower off. is recommended to clean the air conditioning In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the system. – Press button  1 ››› page 146, Air recir- entry of air into the vehicle interior is always culation to close the fresh air vent. Operation from the outside. Air distribution selection WARNING Manual operation – Turn rotary control C ››› Fig. 170 to select Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in the air vents ››› page 143 you wish to acti- General notes on page 142. vate. Emergencies Switching cooling on and off Air conditioning (manual)* – Press the button A/C 2 ››› Fig. 170 and the lamp in the button will illuminate. General notes – Press the A/C 2 button again and the

light in the button will switch off. » Safety The air cooling system only works if A/C button 2 ››› Fig. 170 ››› page 145 is pressed and under following conditions: Fig. 170 Air conditioning: controls. ● The engine is running, 145 Operation

Coldest setting ble once all of the conditions are met ● Press button 1 ››› Fig. 170, the switch's – On turning control A to the coldest setting ››› page 145, General notes. lamp will light up, indicating that air recircu- (blue indicator), buttons 1  and 2 lation inside the vehicle has been activated. A/C , light up Disconnecting the recirculation – The recirculation function is activated auto- Air recirculation matically in order to cool faster. In any position of rotary switch C except Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, thaw: Note e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic, from entering the interior. ● Press button 1 again and the button's ● If the air distribution is directed towards lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula- the windows, all, of the heating power is If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 170 is in the tion from the outside has been activated. used to defrost the windscreen. No warm air thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- is directed to the footwell area. This could ways be open (button light off). In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the limit heating comfort. entry of air into the vehicle interior is always If the rotary switch C is switched from any from the outside. ● The AC button lamp will illuminate after position to the thaw position, recirculation the system has been switched on, even if not will be automatically deactivated. all of the conditions for cooling system oper- WARNING ations are met. Cooling is indicated as availa- Connecting the recirculation Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in General notes on page 142. In any position of rotary switch C except thaw:

146 Air conditioning

Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)

General notes Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 171 Climatronic: controls. Operation

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic ›››  page 36 Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Turn control 10 to the left until the seg- Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: ments of column 9 ››› Fig. 171 switch off. fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running ● After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control cally regulates the supplied air temperature ● the outside temperature is above +2°C again to switch off the display. and the blower and air distribution levels. Emergencies (+36°F); The system also allows for the effect of sun- In order to ensure engines subject to heavy light, so there is no need for manual adjust- ● A/C 18 ››› Fig. 171 switched on. loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- ment. It also has a humidity sensor that pressor is switched off in the event of high helps to automatically demist the wind- Starting the Climatronic coolant temperatures. screen. The corresponding function will be switched Safety Recommended setting for all seasons of the Automatic operations ››› page 148 guaran- on when a button is pressed, turning on the year tee maximum comfort any time of year. air conditioning if it was switched off, with the exception of button 17 ››› Fig. 171 (recir- ● Set the required temperature. We recom- culation). mend +22°C (72°F). » 147 Operation

● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 171. ● Press the AUTO button 13 ››› Fig. 171 and Air recirculation ● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 143 so that AUTO displayed on the screen. the air flow is directed slightly upwards. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, Automatic mode is switched off by pressing e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in the air distribution buttons or increasing or queuing traffic, from entering the interior. Change between degrees Centigrade and de- decreasing the blower speed. However, the grees Fahrenheit temperature remains regulated. Switching on air recirculation mode Keep the AUTO and A/C ››› Fig. 171 buttons held down for 2 seconds at the same time. ● Press button  17 ››› Fig. 171 and the  symbol is displayed on the screen. The data is displayed on the screen in the Adjusting the temperature units required. ● When you switch on the ignition, control 1 Switching off air recirculation mode Note ››› Fig. 171 can be used to set the required in- ● Press button  17 ››› Fig. 171 and the  ● A visit to the specialised service once a terior temperature. symbol disappears from the screen. year is recommended to clean the Climatronic system. It is possible to select interior temperatures WARNING from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this ● 11 The interior temperature sensor range the temperature is regulated automati- Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in ››› Fig. 171 is at the bottom. Do not cover it General notes on page 142. cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is with stickers or the like, as this could have a selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a negative effect on Climatronic operations. temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected, Note “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex- If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 mi- tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool- nutes, the  symbol will start to flash on Automatic mode ing or heating power, respectively. The tem- the screen to indicate prolonged air recircula- perature is not regulated. tion. If air recirculation is not switched off, Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- the symbol will continue to flash for about 5 In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- stant temperature and demist the windows minutes. inside the vehicle. tion of the air flow from the outlets (particularly the footwells) and significant differen- Switching on automatic mode ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold. Blower selection ● Set the interior temperature between +16°C (+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F). Climatronic automatically regulates blower ● Adjust vents 3 ››› page 143 and 4 so that speed according to the interior temperature. the air flow is directed slightly upwards.

148 Driving

It is possible, however, to set the blower Driving ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the speed to suit requirements. engine is running. ● ● Turn control 10 ››› Fig. 171 counter-clock- Starting and stopping the en- Never switch the engine off until the vehi- wise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to in- cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of acci- crease the speed). gine dent! Technical data Technical

Climatronic will switch off when the blower Introduction CAUTION switches off. Read the additional information carefully ● Turning the steering wheel fully in either direction when the vehicle is stationary and WARNING ›››  page 18

the engine is in gear puts the power steering Advice Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in under great stress. This could lead to noise. WARNING General notes on page 142. Never leave the steering wheel turned fully in ● When moving with the engine switched off, either direction for more than 15 seconds. the ignition key must always remain in posi- Risk of damage to the power steering system! tion 2 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 (ignition on). Windscreen defrost ● The starter motor may only be used (key The control lamps will light up in this posi- position 3 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151 in the ig- tion. Otherwise, the steering lock could en- nition) if the engine is off. Using the starter

Switching on windscreen defrosting Operation gage suddenly. Risk of accident! motor when the engine is running could dam- ● Press the button  12 ››› Fig. 171. ● Do not remove the key from the ignition un- age it. til the vehicle has come to a standstill and is ● Immediately release the ignition key when Switching off windscreen defrosting secure (e.g. the handbrake is engaged). Oth- the engine starts, otherwise damage could be erwise, the steering lock could suddenly en- ● Press button  12 ››› Fig. 171 several caused to the starter motor. gage. Risk of accident! times or press the AUTO button. ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid ● Always take the ignition key with you when high engine speeds, driving at full throttle Emergencies The temperature is regulated automatically. you leave the vehicle. This is particularly im- and over-loading the engine before it reaches The air output is increased from vents 1 portant if you leave children in the vehicle. operating temperature. Risk of engine dam- ››› page 143 and 2. Children could, for example, start the engine age! with the subsequent risk of accident. ● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine ● Never leave the engine running in unventi- damage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert-

lated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases er, fuel that has not been burned could reach Safety contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and the catalytic converter and catch fire in it. colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- This would lead to a fault in the catalytic con- dents! Carbon monoxide can cause people to verter. You may use the battery from another » lose consciousness and can cause death. 149 Operation

vehicle to help you start your engine Power steering Go to a specialised workshop as soon as ›››  page 51. possible and have the fault repaired. The power steering allows you to turn the ● After prolonged and demanding operation of the engine, when the journey has ended, steering wheel more easily. WARNING do not stop the engine immediately. Let the If the power steering fails or the engine is off Take it immediately to a specialised work- engine run at idle for about one more minute. (towing), it is still possible to turn the vehi- shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci- This will stop the engine from overheating. cle's steering wheel fully. However, you need dent! more strength to steer the vehicle. For the sake of the environment Note Driver warning lamps and messages Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle If the lamp  (in red) or else  (in yellow) is stationary. If possible, move off immediate- lights up briefly, you may continue driving.  ly after starting the engine. This will help the (in red) Faulty steering! To engine reach operating temperature more park the vehicle quickly, reducing the quantity of emissions. If the warning lamp remains on and the driver Start-up lock security system (immo- indication appears, the power steering could biliser) Note be faulty. ● The engine can only be started with the Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as- There is an electronic chip in the key. The original SEAT key. sistance. electronic immobiliser is deactivated when the key is inserted into the ignition. The elec- ● Loud running noises may be heard briefly  (in yellow) Steering: System tronic immobiliser is automatically activated after cold-starting the engine. This is normal fault! You may continue driving. and is no cause for concern. when the key is removed from the ignition. If the warning lamp comes on, the steering ● After the engine has been stopped and the The engine will not start if an unauthorised could react with more difficultly or more sen- ignition switched off, the radiator fan may key is used. continue running for around 10 minutes. sitivity than normal. In addition, when driving The informative display indicates: ● If the engine still does not start after a sec- in a straight line the steering wheel may be off-centre. ond attempt, the fuel pump fuse might have Immobiliser active! blown. Check it and replace if necessary Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and ››› page 80 or contact your Specialised Serv- have the fault repaired. ice.  ● You should always engage the steering lock (in yellow) Steering lock: when you exit the vehicle. This will hinder fault! Go to an Official Service any attempts at theft. The electronic steering lock is malfunction- ing. 150 Driving

Ignition lock If the steering lock is engaged and it is difficult or impossible to turn the key to position 2 , release the lock by turning the steering wheel slightly in both directions. Technical data Technical Starter button

Fig. 174 Emergency ignition in vehicles with Advice Keyless Access. Fig. 172 Ignition key positions. The start-up button may only be used if there Petrol engines is a valid key in the vehicle. 1 – Ignition switched off, engine stopped, Opening the driver's door when exiting the steering can be locked vehicle activates the electronic lock on the Operation 2 – Ignition switched on steering column if the ignition is disabled. Fig. 173 In the steering column: start-up 3 – Starting push button for the Keyless Access lock and Switching the ignition on/off start-up system. The layout in right-hand Diesel engines drive vehicles is symmetrical. ● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 173 without touching the brake or clutch ped- 1 – Fuel supply stopped, ignition switched al ››› . off, engine stopped, steering can be locked Emergencies 2 – Engine pre-heating, ignition switched Emergency starting function on If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, 3 – Starting an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash

To engage the Steering lock without the key panel display. This may happen when, for ex- Safety in the ignition, turn the steering wheel slight- ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or ly until you hear it engage. flat: »

151 Operation

● Immediately after pushing the start-up but- WARNING ● Press the clutch pedal all the way down ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering and start the engine 3 ››› Fig. 172 column ››› Fig. 174. If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- ››› page 151, without pressing the accelera- out due care, this may cause accidents and tor. Keep the clutch pedal pressed down until ● The ignition connects and the engine starts serious injury. automatically. the engine starts. ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle ● when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- Release the ignition key as soon as the en- Emergency disconnection ised person could lock the vehicle, start the gine starts. The key returns to position 2 . If the engine does not stop after briefly press- engine or connect the ignition and, in this ● If the engine does not start after 10 sec- ing the start-up button, an emergency dis- way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the onds, turn the key back to position 1 . Re- connect will be required: windows). peat the action after 30 seconds. ● Release the handbrake before moving off. ● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec- Note ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds ››› . In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access system, there may be a delay in the engine Switching off the engine with the key ● The engine turns off automatically. starting if it requires preheating. Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to Engine restart feature position 1 ››› Fig. 172 ››› page 151. If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle Starting the engine after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped Brakes and brake servo sys- on the dash panel screen. with a glow plug system. When you switch on the ignition, the glow plug warning lamp  tems After this interval, it will not be possible to will light up. The engine can be started start the engine without a valid key inside straight away when the lamp switches off. the vehicle. Introduction Do not connect electrical appliances during WARNING preheating so as not the drain the vehicle WARNING Any accidental movement of the vehicle could battery unnecessarily. ● The brake servo only works when the en- result in serious injury. gine is running. Braking when the engine is switched off requires applying more strength ● When pressing the start-up button, do not Starting the engine to the brake pedal. Risk of accident! press the brake or clutch pedal, this way the ● Move the gearbox lever into neutral or engine will start immediately. move the selector lever to position P or N and ● Press down on the clutch pedal when stop- pull firmly on the handbrake. ping and braking with a manual gearbox, 152 Driving petrol engine vehicle at low speed. Other- gently on the brake pedal. This causes the matically. A fault in the ABS is indicated by wise, the brake servo might not work proper- brakes to overheat, increasing their wear and the  ››› page 155 warning lamp. ly. Risk of accident! increasing braking distances. ● In the event of damage to the standard ● To ensure the brake assist systems work front spoiler or where a different front spoil- properly, all wheels must be fitted with tyres Control lamp er, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently fitted, approved by the manufacturer. data Technical make sure the air vent to the brakes on the The warning lamp  illuminates if the brake front wheels is not blocked. Otherwise, brak- Note fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the ing operations may be impaired. Risk of acci- ABS system. dent! ● If you brake suddenly and the brake system

● Always fully release the handbrake. If it is control unit regards the situation as hazard- The informative display indicates: Advice ous for the drivers behind you, the brake only partially released, this will cause over- Brake fluid Instruction Manual! heating of the rear brakes, which can impair lights will begin to flash automatically. After the function of the brake system. Risk of acci- reducing speed to approximately 10 km/h (6 Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and dent! mph) or stopping the vehicle, the brake lights check the level of the brake fluid will stop flashing and the hazard warning ● ››› page 209 Never leave children unsupervised in the lights will switch on. The hazard warning vehicle. They could release the handbrake or lights are automatically switched off when WARNING move the gear lever. The vehicle could start you accelerate or restart the vehicle. Operation moving. Risk of accident! ● On long, steep gradients, reduce your ● The following indications must be taken in- ● Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to run speed and change to a lower gear (manual to account when opening the engine com- irregularly or to switch off. Brake assist sys- gearbox) or move the selector lever to a lower partment to check the brake fluid tems could be impaired. Risk of accident! gear position (automatic gearbox). This uses ››› page 202, Engine compartment. ● Always adjust your driving style to suit visi- the force of the engine and the brakes do not ● If the warning lamp  illuminates together bility, the weather and road and traffic condi- suffer as much. If you still have to brake, do with the warning lamp  ››› page 155,  ,

tions. The best vehicle safety offered by so intermittently, pressing down repeatedly stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service. Emergencies brake assist systems must never encourage on the brake pedal. ● A fault in the brake system or in the Anti- you to run greater risks. Risk of accident! ● Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine, lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longer brakes, frame or a combination of wheels and braking distances – Risk of accident! CAUTION tyres) could impair the brake assist systems ››› page 192, Accessories and modifications ● Safety Observe the information concerning new to the vehicle. brake pads ››› page 161. ● In the event of a fault in the ABS system, ● Where braking is not necessary, do not the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off auto- wear down the brake pads by pressing down

153 Operation

Brakes in the brake system. Visit a specialised serv- Releasing the handbrake ice immediately and adjust your driving style – Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and Wear to the extent of the damage and to limit the press the unlock button at the same time The rate of wear of the brake pads depends effect of the brakes. ››› Fig. 175. on the driving style and on the way in which – Keep the button pressed down and push the vehicle is used. The brake pads will wear Low brake fluid level the lever all the way down. more quickly if you use your vehicle frequent- Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults in ly in urban traffic and short trips or drive in a the brake system. The brake fluid level is con- Control lamp sporty style. Under these demanding condi- trolled electronically ››› page 153, Control The warning lamp lights up when the hand- tions, visit your specialised service, even be- lamp. brake is applied with the ignition on . fore the scheduled service date, so that the thickness of the brake pads can be meas- Brake servo Additionally, driving the vehicle at speeds ex- ured. ceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for at least 3 sec- The brake servo supplements the pressure onds produces an audible warning. you exert on the brake pedal. The brake servo Wet roads or road salt only works when the engine is running. The informative display indicates: If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driv- Release the handbrake! ing on roads which have been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than nor- Handbrake mal. Dry the brakes as soon as possible by braking repeatedly. Braking and stability systems

Corrosion Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Long periods of inactivity and little use can lead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on the The ESC system increases control of the vehi- brake pads. Where the brake system is sub- cle in emergency situations, e.g. during a jected to light stress or in the case of corro- sudden change in direction. Depending on sion, clean the brake discs by braking fully the driving conditions, it reduces the risk of several times at a high speed. skidding and increases driving stability. The system uses the steering wheel angle Fig. 175 Centre console: handbrake. Brake system fault and road speed to calculate the changes of If you notice that the braking distance sud- Applying the handbrake direction desired by the driver, and constant- denly increases and the brake pedal can be ly compares them with the actual behaviour pressed down more fully, there may be a fault – Pull the handbrake lever up all the way. of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for 154 Driving example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the pressed down firmly until the vehicle comes and turn it on again. Upon switching on the ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati- to a standstill. ignition again, if the warning lamp has cally. switched off, this means the ESC is function- With the help of this system, the ABS is acti- ing correctly again. The  warning lamp on the general instru- vated more quickly and more efficiently. ment panel starts flashing when the system If the  warning lamp is illuminated there is

The brake assist function is deactivated auto- data Technical is working. a fault in the ESC. matically when the brake pedal is released. The stability (ESC) system includes the fol- The informative display indicates: Hill hold control (HHC)* lowing systems: Report No.: electronic stability ● Anti-lock brake system (ABS), The HHC system makes it easier to start the control (ESC) vehicle on hills. The system maintains the Advice ● Traction control system (TCS), or brake pressure created by pressing down on ● Electronic differential lock (EDL), the brake pedal for 2 seconds after it has Report No.: Traction control ● Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA), been released. Your foot can be removed system (ASR) from the brake pedal and you can use the ac- ● Hill hold control (HHC). Go to a technical service. celerator pedal and move away on a hill without having to use the handbrake. The brake The ASR should be switched on at all times. Note Only under certain circumstances should the pressure drops as the accelerator pedal is Operation system be switched off, e.g. pressed. If the vehicle cannot be started, it If the battery is disconnected and connected again, the yellow warning lamp  lights up ● will start to move backwards after 2 seconds. driving with chains, when the ignition is switched on. This warn- ● driving in deep snow or on very soft surfa- The HHC is activated on gradients of over ing lamp must switch off after covering a ces, 5%, if the driver door is closed. It only works short distance. for starting on hills, moving both forward and ● During the “swinging movement” required in reverse. It is not activated during start-up to remove a stuck vehicle Emergencies down hill. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible. Control lamp The ABS system prevents the wheels locking Brake assist system (HBA)* If the control lamp  flashes, the ESC is during braking. This helps the driver keep control of the vehicle. The HBA system is activated when you press working. Safety down on the brake pedal suddenly. It increa- If the  warning lamp illuminates on igni- The driver is made aware of ABS assistance ses braking power, helping to reduce braking tion, the ESC system may have switched off by the pulsating of the brake pedal and a distances. To reduce braking distance as due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition characteristic noise. » much as possible, keep the brake pedal 155 Operation

Keep the brake pedal pressed down while the If the control lamp  flashes, the ASR is Manual gearbox ABS is working. The ABS will switch off when working. the brake pedal is released. Never brake in- If the  warning lamp illuminates on igni- Changing gears termittently while the ABS is working! tion, the TCS system may have switched off due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition Control lamp and turn it on again. Upon switching on the If the  warning lamp is illuminated, there is ignition again, if the warning lamp has a fault in the ABS. switched off, this means the TCS is functioning correctly again. The informative display indicates: If the  warning lamp remains illuminated, ABS fault there is a fault in the TCS. The brake system alone is operational in the The informative display indicates: vehicle, without ABS. Go to a technical service. Report No.: Traction control system (ASR) Fig. 176 Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speed manual gearbox WARNING Go to a technical service. ● If the  warning lamp illuminates together Read the additional information carefully with the ››› page 153  warning lamp,  , ›››  page 34 stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service. Electronic differential lock When changing gear, always depress the ● A fault in the Anti-lock brake system (ABS) clutch pedal fully and keep it pressed down If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDL can lead to longer braking distances – Risk of to avoid excessive clutch wear. accident! brakes that wheel, transmitting the driving force to the other wheels. This increases ve- In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow hicle stability and improves driving stability. the gear change indications ›››  page 25. Anti-slip regulation of the driving To prevent the disc brake of the braking Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is wheels (ASR)* wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- stopped. On engaging reverse gear while the tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. engine is running, first wait a moment with If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts the The vehicle will continue to function normally the clutch pedal pressed down fully to limit engine speed to the driving conditions. Par- without EDL. The EDL will switch on again au- gear shift noise. ticularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCS tomatically when the brake has cooled down. The reverse lights switch on when the reverse helps starting, accelerating and hill starts. gear is selected and the ignition is on.

156 Driving

WARNING plied before moving the selector lever to the and the vehicle could move backwards. Risk park position. This reduces the load on the of accident! Never engage reverse gear when moving for- lock mechanism while making it easier to ward. Risk of accident! ● If you have to stop on a hill, press down on move the selector lever from position P. the brake pedal to stop the vehicle from mov- If, while the vehicle is moving, the selector ing.

Note data Technical lever is accidentally moved to position N, re- ● The drive wheels could lose traction on a Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while lease the accelerator and wait for the engine slippery road surface when the kick-down driving. The pressure of your hand could lead to idle before moving it back into position. function is activated. Risk of sliding! to premature wear of the gear system.

WARNING CAUTION Advice ● Never press the accelerator when selecting ● In DSG automatic gearboxes, the double Automatic gearbox the automatic gearbox operating mode when clutch is protected from overloads. If the hill the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident! hold control is used, the clutches are subjec- Basic information ● Never move the selector lever to positions ted to greater force if the vehicle is at a R or P when driving. Risk of accident! standstill on a slope or suddenly accelerating The gearbox changes up and down automati- ● If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gear on a slope. ●  cally. The gearbox can be set to Tiptronic selected and the engine idling (e.g. waiting Should the clutches overheat, the sym- Operation mode. The gears can be changed manually in or moving slowly at traffic lights), press down bol is shown on the informative display with this mode ››› page 159. on the brake pedal because the transmission a warning message Gear overheated. is not entirely interrupted when the engine is Stop! Instruction Manual! An audible The engine can only be started in positions P idling and the vehicle will tend to start mov- warning is also heard. Stop the vehicle in this or N. If, on engaging the steering lock, ing. case, stop the engine and wait until the sym-  switching the ignition on/off or starting the ● Apply the handbrake firmly and put the se- bol has switched off. Danger of damage to engine, the selector lever is not in these posi- lector lever in position P before opening the the gearbox! You can continue driving once Emergencies tions, the informative display will show Move bonnet and working on the vehicle with the the symbol is switched off. the selector lever to position engine running. Risk of accident! Strictly fol- P/N!, or  P/N is shown on the general low the safety instructions ››› page 202, En- dash panel display. gine compartment. Starting and driving At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the en- ● When stopping on a slope (hill), try not to gine can only be started in position P. stop the vehicle from moving by pressing the Starting Safety “accelerator” with a gear selected. This could – Press and hold the brake pedal. Move the selector lever to position P when overheat the clutch. If the clutch risks being parking the vehicle on a flat surface. On a burnt due to this force, it would switch off – Press and hold the interlock button on the slope, the handbrake should be firmly ap- selector lever knob and move the selector » 157 Operation

lever to position ››› page 158 before releas- shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. It The current position of the selector lever is ing the interlock button. only shifts up after the maximum engine shown on the general instrument panel dis- speed has been reached. play 1 ››› Fig. 178. – Release the brake and press the accelerator. P – Parking position Stopping Selector lever positions In this position, the driven wheels are me- chanically locked. – The selector lever does not have to be moved to position N if the vehicle is stop- The parking position can only be selected ped for a short period, e.g. at intersections. when the vehicle is stationary. Applying the brake is enough. However, the If you want to move the selector lever from engine must remain idling. this position, press the interlock button on the selector lever knob while pressing down Parking on the brake pedal. – Press the brake pedal. If the battery is drained, the selector lever – Apply the handbrake. cannot be moved from position P.

– Press the interlock button, move the selec- Fig. 177 Gear selector lever tor lever to position P and release the but- R – Reverse gear ton. Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling. Kick-down feature To move the selector lever to position R from The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- positions P or N, press the interlock button celeration to be reached. on the selector lever knob and press down on In any gear programme, press down fully on the brake pedal. the accelerator for the automatic gearbox to The reverse lights come on when the selector activate the kick-down feature. This function lever is in position R and the ignition is on. takes priority over the gear programmes without taking into account the position of the se- N – Neutral (idling) lector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used to Fig. 178 Informative display: selector lever reach maximum acceleration, using full en- positions. Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position. gine power. Depending on the road speed To move the selector lever from position N (if Read the additional information carefully and engine speed, the automatic gearbox the lever has remained in this position for ›››  page 35 158 Driving more than 2 seconds) to position D or R at Tiptronic The manual gearbox can be activated when speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle is either moving or stationary. when the vehicle is stationary, press down on When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- the brake pedal. ly shifts up shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached. D – Drive (forwards) data Technical On shifting up, the gear is only engaged In this position, the gearbox automatically when there is no risk of engine damage. changes to a lower or higher gear, depending on engine requirements, the driving speed When the accelerator pedal is pressed down and the gear shift programme. to the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shift down in line with the road speed and engine Advice To move the selector lever to position D from speed. position N at speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 Fig. 179 Selector lever: Tiptronic. mph) and when the vehicle is stationary, Note press down on the brake pedal. The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver to The kick-down function is also available in change gears manually using the selector In some situations (e.g. on mountain roads or manual shift mode. when towing a trailer or caravan), it can be lever. advantageous to switch temporarily to the Operation manual shift programme ››› page 159 so that Activating the manual gearbox Selector lever lock the gear ratios can be selected manually to – From position D, push the selector lever to suit driving conditions. the right. The selected position of the se- Automatic selector lever lock  lector lever is shown on the general instru- S – Sports driving position ment panel display together with the gear The selector lever is locked in the positions P and N when the ignition is on. Press down on Shifting up later than usual makes full use of engaged 1 ››› Fig. 178. the brake to unlock it. Remember, if the se- Emergencies the engine power. This shifts down earlier in lector lever is in positions P and N, the warn- relation to position D. Shifting up ing lamp  will light up on the general in- To move the selector lever to position S from – Push the selector lever gently forwards + strument panel. position D, press the interlock button on the ››› Fig. 179. When the selector lever merely moves

selector lever knob. Safety Shifting down through position N (e.g. when moved from R to D), the lever lock is not applied. This – Push the selector lever gently backwards makes it possible, for example, to rock a - ››› Fig. 179. stuck vehicle backwards and forwards. The »

159 Operation

lock is only applied if the brake is not press- shifts up as quickly as possible and shifts Backup programme ed and the selector lever is moved to position down as late as possible, thus increasing N for more than 2 seconds. driving economy. A back-up programme exists in case of faults. The selector lever only locks when the is vehi- With a sporty driving style, characterised by In the event of a fault in the gearbox electron- cle stationary or driving at a speed lower sudden acceleration, heavy acceleration, ics, it will continue to work in one of the cor- than 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, it speeds that often increase and decrease and responding back-up programmes. All seg- automatically disconnects in the N position. maximum speed, the gearbox adapts to this ments of the screen are lit up or switched off. driving style when the accelerator is pressed Interlock button down fully (kick-down) by shifting down as The fault can be seen as follows: quickly as possible and can even shift down ● The gearbox only engages certain gears The interlock button on the selector lever by several gears at once. knob prevents the driver from inadvertently ● Reverse gear R cannot be engaged engaging a gear. Press the button to unlock Selecting the best driving programmes is an ● The manual gearbox switches off in the the selector lever. endless job. Regardless of this, the driver can back-up programme also make the gearbox switch to a more dy- Safety interlock for ignition key1) namic gear shift programme by pressing the Note accelerator quickly. This makes the automatic After switching off the ignition, you can only If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro- gearbox shift down into a lower gear than the remove the ignition key if the selector lever is gramme, visit an Authorised Service as soon in position P. When the ignition key is re- one that would normally apply to the current as possible to solve the problem. moved, the selector lever is locked in posi- speed, allowing for more rapid acceleration tion P. (e.g. to overtake another vehicle) without having to press the accelerator until the kick- down position. On shifting up in a corre- Gearbox malfunctions sponding driving style, the gearbox returns to  Driving programmes the original programme. Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- When driving along mountain roads, the position P. ly-controlled automatic gearbox. Shifting up gearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoids There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- or down depends on the programme selec- having to frequently change gears when driv- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ted. ing uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible to shift down manually when driving downhill to ing. Seek specialist assistance. For a calm driving style, the gearbox uses the use the braking effect of the engine. most economic programme. The gearbox

1) Valid only for certain countries. 160 Driving

 Gearbox: System fault! You Run-in and economical driving Even after running in, the vehicle should not may continue driving. be unnecessarily driven at high engine speeds. The maximum permitted engine Have the fault corrected by a specialised The first 1,500 km speed is marked at the start of the red zone workshop without delay. Over the first 1,500 kilometres the engine on the rev counter dial. The gear must be

 data Technical Gearbox: System fault! You must be run in. changed up when the red area is reached in can continue driving with re- vehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremely strictions. Reverse gear disa‐ high engine speeds when accelerating are Up to 1000 kilometres bled automatically limited, however the engine is – Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi- not protected against high engine speeds Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop mum speed corresponding to the engaged produced by incorrectly changing to a lower Advice and have the fault repaired without delay. gear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permit- gear, which could cause the engine to run at  Gearbox: System fault! You ted engine speed. revs above the maximum permitted amount, can continue driving in D until – Do not drive at full speed. and consequently result in damage to the en- switching off the engine gine. – Avoid high engine speeds. Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearbox from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- – Do not tow a trailer. must also bear the following in mind: do not tance. drive with the engine speed too low. Change Operation From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your down to a lower gear when the engine no miles) driving accordingly longer runs smoothly. Observe the recom- – Slowly increase the engine speed until mendations for changing gear Continue driving at moderate speeds. When reaching the maximum permitted speed of ›››  page 25. the warning lamp switches off, you can con- the engaged gear, i.e. the maximum per- tinue driving in a normal manner. mitted engine speed. New tyres Emergencies  Gearbox: press the brake and New tyres must be submitted to “running in”, During its first few hours of running, the in- engage a gear again. given that initially their grip is not yet at the ternal friction in the engine is greater than maximum level. During the first 500 km (120 If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a later on, when all the moving parts have bed- miles) drive very carefully. high temperature, this driver message will be ded in. How the vehicle is driven over approx-

displayed when the gearbox has cooled imately the first 1,500 kilometres (900 Safety again. miles), determines the success of the proc- New brake pads ess of running in the engine. New brake pads do not yet provide maximum friction capacity. First they must be “run in”. »

161 Operation

During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive very ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual carefully. accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, ISO 1629. etc.). CAUTION ● The use of water-soluble paints. All the information for speed and engine Choice of materials speed refers to an engine that operates at op- ● Use of recycled materials. erating temperature. Do not run the engine at ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Economical and environmentally- high engine speeds, neither when stopped or while driving. if its components are not easily separated. friendly driving ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials Fuel consumption, environmental pollution originating from renewable sources. For the sake of the environment and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine pends in large part on your driving style. By ing odour, in plastic materials. speeds; changing to a higher gear sooner adopting an economical driving style and an- contributes to saving fuel, reduces operating ● Use of CFC-free coolants. ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can noise and protects the environment. easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive tion while saving money are listed below. 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- Environmental compatibility valent chromium. Drive anticipating the traffic situation Environmental protection is a top priority in Manufacturing methods A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. the design, choice of materials and manufac- When you anticipate situations, you have to ture of your new SEAT. ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If protective wax for cavities. it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear Constructive measures to encourage recy- ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- engaged, for example, if you see a red light cling hicle transport. ahead. The braking effect achieved in this ● Joints and connections designed for easy ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and dismantling tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner- ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- tems. tia). tling ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- ● Increased use of single-grade materials. dues (RDF). Change gear early to save energy ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears. Running the 162 Driving engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses Periodic maintenance The tyre pressures should always be checked an unnecessary amount of fuel. Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, when the tyres are cold. Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second before beginning a journey, you will not con- Do not use winter tyres all year round as they gear as soon as possible. We recommend sume more than the required amount of fuel. increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. that, whenever possible, you change to a A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- Avoid unnecessary weight data Technical the “recommended gear” indication that ap- mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- pears on the instrument panel ue. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable  . ››› page 25 A badly serviced engine can consume up to to always check the luggage compartment to 10% more fuel than necessary. make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- Advice Avoid driving at high speed ing transported. We advise you not to drive at the top speed Avoid short journeys A roof rack is often left in place for the sake permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, To reduce the consumption and emission of of convenience, even when it is no longer exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving exhaust gas filtration systems should reach and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. the optimum operating temperature. about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra

wind resistance caused by the roof rack even Operation Avoid idling With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine does not when it is not in use. It is worthwhile switching off the engine warm up and fuel consumption does not nor- when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- malise until having driven approximately four Save electricity ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom- The engine activates the alternator, which The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is mend avoiding short trips whenever possi- produces electricity. With the need for elec- greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- ble. tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- start the engine. Emergencies cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- The engine takes a long time to warm up Maintain the correct tyre pressures ces when you do not need them. Examples of when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- devices that use a lot of electricity are: the tant emissions are also especially high dur- equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres- fan at high speeds, the rear window heating ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too and the seat heaters*. Safety best to drive off immediately after starting low, fuel consumption can increase by as the engine. Avoid running the engine at high much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist- Note speed. ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear ● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec- wear and impairs handling. ommended to switch this function off. » 163 Operation

● It is recommended that you close the win- ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle CAUTION dows when driving at more than 60 km/h around the area of the exhaust system: Fire ● Never completely empty the tank! An irreg- (37 mph) hazard! ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults, ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the which can result in damage to a substantial clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the Note amount of engine parts and the exhaust sys- plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can tem. burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious While the control lamps , ,  or  re- ● Refuelling just once with leaded petrol dis- fault. main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel consumption may increase and the engine ables the exhaust system! ● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the may lose power. clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch Particulate filter  (diesel engines) plate from being damaged. Catalytic converter The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates ● On descents, use the engine brake, chang- most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- ing to the gear that is more suitable for the An exhaust gas emission control system (cat- slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and alytic converter) that functions perfectly is vi- tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- the brakes will not suffer. tally important for vehicle operation that re- ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is spects the environment. cleaned automatically without need for indication by the warning lamp . This may be Please observe the following indications: noticed because the engine idle speed in- Engine management and ex- ● Refuel only using unleaded petrol in petrol creases and an odour may be detected. haust gas purification system engine vehicles ››› page 200. If automatic filter purification cannot be car- ● Do not add too much oil to the engine ried out (because only short trips are taken, Introduction ››› page 207, Checking engine oil level. for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- ● Do not switch off the ignition while driving. ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning  WARNING lamp will switch on. If you are required to drive in a country where Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- ● Because of the high temperatures which unleaded fuel is not available, when return- ess by driving in the following manner: drive can occur in the exhaust purification system ing to a country where using a catalytic con- for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil- verter is obligatory, the catalytic converter ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear must be replaced. haust can come into contact with flammable (automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en- materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The the forest edge). Fire hazard!

164 Driving rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil- vides information about the countries where drive carefully to the nearest specialised ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning fuel with a high sulphur content is used. workshop to have the engine checked. the warning lamp will switch off. If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in Engine management*  Engine pre-heating/fault system*  the emission control system  and glow data Technical plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised This warning lamp monitors the engine man- The warning lamp lights up to show that the workshop and have the fault repaired at the agement system for petrol engines. glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine. earliest opportunity. The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con- The control lamp  lights up

trol) lights up when the ignition is switched Advice WARNING  on while system operation is being verified. It If the control lamp lights up when the en- ● Always drive according to the road weather should go out once the engine is started. gine is started it means that the glow plugs conditions, the terrain and traffic. are preheating. The engine can be started If there is a fault in the electronic engine ● straight away when the lamp switches off. The particulate filter attains very high tem- management system while you are driving, peratures. Therefore, do not park the vehicle this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- in places where the exhaust pipe could come Control lamp  flashes into contact with dry grass or with highly- cle to a specialised workshop as soon as

If a fault develops in the engine management Operation possible and have the engine checked. flammable materials. Risk of fire! system while you are driving, the glow plug system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to CAUTION a specialised workshop as soon as possible Emission control system*  and have the engine checked. While the warning lamp  is lit up, the fuel consumption is high, and in certain condi- Control lamp  flashes: tions, the engine power is reduced.

When there is misfiring that can damage the Emergencies catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive Note carefully to the nearest specialised workshop ● In order for the particulate filter to burn off to have the engine checked. soot in a correct manner, avoid carrying out frequent short journeys. The control lamp  lights up: Safety ● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur count If a fault has developed during driving which can considerably reduce the useful life of the has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas particulate filter. The specialised service pro- (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and

165 Operation

Driving tips WARNING Note ● Driving through water, dirt and mud can re- After driving through water we recommend Driving through flooded roads duce braking capability and prolong the brak- that you contact a specialised service for an ing distance – Risk of accident! inspection. ● Do not carry out any sudden or strong braking manoeuvres after driving through water. ● Clean and dry the brakes as soon as possi- Preventing damage to the vehicle ble after driving through water by breaking intermittently. Carry out braking in order to In order to prevent damage to the vehicle, dry the brakes and clean the brake discs only take special care: if traffic so permits. Do not put other drivers ● on roads that are in poor condition, at risk. ● when mounting kerbs, CAUTION ● when approaching very steep ramps, etc., Fig. 180 Driving through water. ● In the event of driving through water, parts ● with the parts of the vehicle situated on the To prevent the vehicle from being damaged of the vehicle can be seriously damaged, lower part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, the when driving through water (i.e. flooded such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic con- exhaust pipe. roads), please observe the following: verter, suspension or the electrical system. This applies especially to vehicles with a very ● Oncoming vehicles that drive through wa- ● Determine the depth of the water before low suspension (sport) and when the vehicle ter can cause waves that exceed your vehi- entering. Water can reach a maximum height is fully loaded. of below the door sill ››› Fig. 180. cle's permitted level for driving through water. ● Drive at a maximum pace of walking speed. ● There may be pot-holes mud or rocks under Driving at a higher speed can cause a wave the water that can hinder or prevent driving in front of the vehicle, which can cause water through water. to enter the engine air intake system or other ● parts of the vehicle. Do not drive through salt water. The salt can cause rust. All components that are ex- ● Never stop in the water, never reverse and posed to salt water must be rinsed immedi- never stop the engine. ately with fresh water. ● Before driving through water deactivate the Start-Stop system ››› page 181.

166 Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems tered. Pay special attention to children and system will not give any further warning. In animals. certain circumstances, objects such as high Parking aid ● Always keep visual control of the vehicle kerbs that could damage the bottom of the surroundings: use the mirrors for additional vehicle are not detected either. help. ● If the first warning from the Parking Aid is General information ignored, the vehicle could suffer considerable data Technical damage. Various systems are available to help you CAUTION ● The knocks or damage on the radiator when parking or manoeuvring in tight Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- spaces, depending on the equipment fitted fected by different factors that may lead to body can adjust the orientation of the sen- on your vehicle. damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- sors. This can affect the parking aid function. Advice rounds: The rear parking aid is an audible assistant Have the function checked by a specialised that warns about obstacles located behind ● Under certain circumstances, the system workshop. the vehicle ››› page 168. does not detect or display certain objects: – Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, Note During parking, Parking System Plus assists fences, posts and thin trees. the driver by visually and audibly warning ● In certain situations, the system can give a – Objects that are located above the sen- them about obstacles detected in front and warning even though there is no obstacle in sors, such as protrusions in a wall. Operation behind the vehicle ››› page 168. the detected area, e.g: – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- – with rough or cobbled floors or ground tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- WARNING with long grass; der snow. ● – with external ultrasound sources, such as Always pay attention, also when looking ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments cleaning vehicles or other vehicles; straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- roundings. The assistance systems are not a nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- – In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-

replacement for driver awareness. When in- rectly, these objects or people wearing such haust gases; Emergencies serting or removing the vehicle from a park- clothes. – if the registration plate (front or rear) is ing space, or when performing similar ma- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected not properly affixed to the bumper sur- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- face; sponsibility. by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detect- – or in locations such as the brow of a hill. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all

ing people or objects. Safety times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- ● In order to guarantee good system opera- fic conditions. ● Please note that low obstacles detected by tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free the system may no longer be registered by of snow or ice, and do not cover them with ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in the sensors as the car moves closer, so the adhesives or other objects. » which obstacles and people are not regis-

167 Operation

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- Description On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply There are sensors integrated in the rear system is disconnected immediately. it directly only very briefly and always from a bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta- distance of more than 10 cm. cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, Parking system plus* such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the Make particularly sure that the sensors are operation of the Parking Aid. not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195. tem, it is advised that you practice parking in an area or car park that is free from traffic. The approximate measurement range of the There must be good weather and light condi- rear sensors is: tions. ● The volume and tone of the warnings can side area 0.90 m be modified, in addition to the indications ››› page 171. central area 1.60 m ● In vehicles without a driver information As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- system, these parameters can be modified in val between the audible warnings will be re- Fig. 181 Represented area. a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the workshop. warning will be constant: Do not continue to Parking system plus assists you audibly and ● Please observe information on towing a move forward (or backward) ››› in General visually when parking. trailer ››› page 171. information on page 167, ››› in General in- There are sensors integrated in the front and ● The display on the Easy Connect screen formation on page 167 ! rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, shows a slight time delay. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings and visu- the volume of the warning begins to reduce ally on the Easy Connect system. after four seconds (does not affect the tone Rear parking aid* In the event of danger of a frontal collision, of the constant warning). the audible warnings come from the front of The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of Activating/Deactivating parking by means of audible warning a rear-end collision they come from the rear. sounds. When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid Make particularly sure that the sensors are is automatically switched on. This is con- not covered by adhesives, residues and the firmed with a short warning. like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions ››› page 195.

168 Driver assistance systems

The approximate measurement range of the Manual connection of Parking Aid Change from reduced view to full view sensors is: ● Press the  button once. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector A 1.20 m lever to position R. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid ● B 0.90 m OR: press the car icon in reduced view. ●  Press the button again. data Technical C 1.60 m If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image D 0.90 m Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display (Rear View Camera “RVC”) (the audible sounds remain active) As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector val between the audible warnings will be re- ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- lever to position R. duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the tory-assembled infotainment system. ● OR: Press the RVC function button. Advice warning will be constant: do not continue to ● OR: press the BACK function button. move forward (or backward)! A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up yellow when Automatic connection of Parking Aid If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the system is switched on. the volume of the warning begins to reduce ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector after four seconds (does not affect the tone lever to position R. of the constant warning). ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle Automatic activation Operation that is in its forwards path at a speed below 10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 169, Automatic ac- Parking Aid Operation tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown. Emergencies Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● OR: accelerate to more than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) forward. Fig. 183 Miniature indication of automatic ac- Safety tivation Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid Fig. 182 Centre console: parking aid button. When the Parking System Plus is switched on ● Press the  function button. automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will » 169 Operation

be displayed and the segments will be If the system has been activated automatical- White segments: a white segment is dis- shown on the left side of the screen ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- played when the obstacle is not within ››› Fig. 183. en when obstacles in front are at a distance the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of less than 50 cm. of travel is in the opposite direction to Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- its location. proaching an obstacle located in front of the CAUTION vehicle. It only operates every time the speed Yellow segments: obstacles located in the is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 The automatic connection of the Parking Aid vehicle's trajectory and which are more mph) for the first time. only works when you are driving slowly. If than 30 cm away from the vehicle are driving style is not adapted to the circum- displayed in yellow. If the parking aid is switched off using the  stances, an accident and serious injury or Red segments: obstacles that are less than button, the following actions must be carried damage may be caused. out in order for it to automatically switch on: 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in red. ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. Segments of the visual indication Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- ● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- cates the vehicle's expected journey based fore reducing speed below this number on the steering wheel angle. again. Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- ● OR: place the selector lever in position P cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding and then move it from this position. audible warning will sound. ● OR: switch on and off the automatic activation in the Easy Connect system menu. As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. The automatic activation with parking aid When the penultimate segment is displayed, miniature indication can be switched on and this means that the vehicle has reached the off from the Easy Connect system menu collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- Fig. 184 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- : stacles are represented in red, including ›››  page 21 nect system screen. those out of the path. Do not continue to ● Switch the ignition on. The distance of separation from the obstacle move forward (or backward) ››› in General ● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parking can be estimated using the segments around information on page 167, ››› in General in- and manoeuvring. the vehicle. formation on page 167 ! ● Select the Automatic activation op- The optical indication of the segments works tion. When the function button check box is as follows: activated , the function is on. 170 Driver assistance systems

Adjusting the display and audible Error messages Parking System Plus warnings The distance to possible obstacles at the rear When the Parking Aid is activated or when it of the vehicle will not be displayed on the The settings for the display and audible is switched on, if a continuous warning can screen and nor will it be indicated by means warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- be heard for several seconds (additionally, in of audible sound signals. nect*. the case of Parking system Plus, the LED of data Technical the  button flashes), there is a fault in the The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- Automatic activation system. play objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.  on – activates the Automatic activa- Parking System Plus* tion option ››› page 169. If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is Advice  off – deactivates the Automatic ac- displayed on the Easy Connect display in Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- tivation option ››› page 169. front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is era”* faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and Front volume* B are displayed ››› Fig. 181. If a front sensor Volume in the front and rear area. is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C Operating and safety warnings and D are displayed.

WARNING Operation Front sound settings/sharpness* Have the fault corrected by a specialised Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front workshop without delay. ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible area. to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it overcome the system's own limits, hence us- Rear volume* Towing bracket ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- Volume in the rear area. ries if used negligently or without due care.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket The driver should be aware of his/her sur- Emergencies Rear sound settings/sharpness* device from the factory, when the trailer is roundings at all times to ensure safe driving. connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear ● The camera lens expands and distorts the sensors will not be activated when reverse field of vision and displays the objects on the area. gear is engaged, when the selector lever is screen in a different, vague manner. The per- turned to position R or when the button  is ception of distances is also distorted by this Safety Adjust volume pressed. effect. » With the parking aid switched on, the active audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting. 171 Operation

● Some objects may, due to the resolution of ● In the following situations, the objects or Instructions for use the display screen - not be displayed in a sat- other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- isfactory manner or may not be displayed at tem display appear to be further away or all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, closer than they really are: Pay special atten- railings or trees that might not be displayed tion: on screen and could damage the vehicle. – On moving from a horizontal plane to a ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is slope. not possible to represent people or objects – On moving from a slope to a horizontal (small children, animals and certain objects plane. cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the times. rear. ● – When the vehicle approaches objects Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and Fig. 185 On the rear bumper: location of the snow, and do not cover it. that are not on the ground surface or are jutting out from it. These objects may al- rear assist camera ● The system is not a replacement for driver so be outside the camera's angle of vi- awareness. Supervise the parking operation sion when reversing. A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround- during reverse parking or manoeuvring ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style ››› Fig. 185. The camera image is viewed to- Note at all times to suit visibility, weather, road gether with orientation lines projected by the and traffic conditions. ● It is important to take great care and pay system on the Infotainment system screen. ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by special attention if you are not yet familiar The bottom of the screen displays part of the looking at the screen. with the system. bumper corresponding to the number plate ● The images on the rear assist screen are ● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- area that will be used as reference by the only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial cle's rear lid is open. driver. depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or Rear assist settings: may not be seen at all. Rear assist offers the user the possibility to ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of change the image's brightness, contrast and the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes with ve- colour settings. hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi- To change these settings: cle's surroundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment is carrying ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. a heavy load. ● Apply the parking brake. 172 Driver assistance systems

● Switch the ignition on. too much traffic or in a car park when there Parking and manoeuvring with the ● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment are good weather and visibility conditions. rear assist system. Cleaning the camera lens ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice: data Technical ● Press the --- function button displayed on the right of the image. ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- ● Make the desired adjustments on the menu based glass cleaning product and clean the by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by lens with a dry cloth. moving the corresponding scroll button. ● Remove snow using a small brush. Advice ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. Necessary conditions for parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist CAUTION Fig. 186 Display on the Infotainment system The system should not be used in the follow- screen: orientation lines. ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to ing cases: clean the camera lens. Switching the system on and off

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice Operation ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty tion is on or the engine running, on engaging damage the camera. lens. reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- played very clearly or is incomplete. matic gearbox). ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. ● The system switches off 8 seconds after

● If the position and installation angle of the disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) Emergencies camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- or removing the selector lever from the R po- end collision. Have the system checked by a sition (automatic gearbox). The system will specialised workshop. also disconnect immediately after the ignition is switched off.

Familiarising yourself with the system In combination with the Parking System Plus Safety To familiarise yourself with the system, the ››› page 167, the camera image will cease to orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- be transmitted immediately when reverse ommends practising parking and manoeu- gear is engaged or when the selector lever is vring with the rear assist in a place without moved from the R position, and the optical » 173 Operation

information provided by the Parking Aid sys- 3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of The cruise control system allows you to drive tem will be displayed. approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on at a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or the road surface. higher without having to press the accelera- Also in combination with the system, the rear tor. However, the speed is only maintained assist image can also be concealed: 4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe distance of approximately 40 cm at the rear within the margin permitted by the engine ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system of the vehicle on the road surface. power and the braking effect of the engine. buttons on the display. The  warning lamp lights up on the general ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that Parking manoeuvre instrument panel if cruise control is switched appears on the left of the screen (which ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking on. switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- space and engage reverse gear (manual ing System Plus's optical system). gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- WARNING tion (automatic gearbox). If you wish to display the rear assist image ● For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or again: ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side orientation lines lead to- where roads conditions are poor (e.g. due to ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector wards the parking space. ice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow). – Risk of accident! lever's position, engage reverse again or ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so move the selector lever to position R. ● The programmed speed can only be re-es- that the side orientation lines run parallel to tablished if it is not too high for current traf- ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) it. fic conditions. ● Meaning of the orientation lines Always switch the cruise control system off after using it in order to avoid involuntary ››› Fig. 186 cruise speed (Cruise control)* use. 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the approximate width of the vehicle plus the Introduction CAUTION rear view mirrors) on the road surface. ● The cruise control cannot maintain a con- 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in Read the additional information carefully stant speed when the vehicle is moving green ends approximately 2 m behind ›››  page 31 downhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate un- the vehicle on the road surface. der its own weight. Therefore, shift down or

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R. 174 Driver assistance systems

use the brake pedal in good time to slow the – Briefly press rocker switch 2 in SET posi- Setting a lower speed vehicle. tion when you have reached the speed you – The set speed can be reduced by pressing wish to set. switch 2 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in SET. Note On releasing rocker switch 2 from SET, the – If the button is held down in the SET posi- current speed is stored and will remain con- ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the tion, the speed decreases continuously. Re- data Technical cruise control system cannot be switched on stant without having to press the accelerator lease the switch when the required speed if the selector lever is in position P, N or R. pedal. is reached. The speed is stored. ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, the – On releasing the switch at speeds of less cruise control cannot be switched on if first than 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will be

gear or reverse gear is engaged. Adjust the stored speed set and the memory will be deleted. The ve- Advice hicle must be moving at a speed of over Increasing speed by pressing the accelerator 30 km/h (19 mph) and switch 2 pressed pedal Setting the speed again to SET for it to be set. – Press the accelerator to increase the speed of the vehicle. The speed can be reduced by pressing the brake pedal, which temporarily switches off – Release the accelerator and the previously the cruise control. programmed speed will be resumed. Operation If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicle exceeds the programmed speed by more Temporary deactivation of cruise con- than 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 mi- trol nutes, the set speed will be deleted. The speed will have to be stored again. Cruise control is switched off temporarily by

pressing switch 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in Emergencies CANCEL or by pressing the brake or clutch Fig. 187 Turn signal and main beam head- Increasing speed by pressing switch 2 pedal. light lever: cruise control buttons. – Press rocker switch 2 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 in RES. The set speed is stored. Setting speed – If the button is held down in the RES posi- To recover the set speed, briefly press switch Safety – Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 187 to the ON position, the speed increases continuously. Re- 2 in RES once you have released the brake tion. lease the switch when the required speed or clutch pedal. is reached. The speed is stored.

175 Operation

Turning off the cruise control system Advance warning Front assist If the system detects a possible collision with If the Front Assist notices that the driver is – Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› page 175 to the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by not braking sufficiently in case of a collision OFF. means of an audible warning and an indica- hazard, the system can increase braking ef- tion on the instrument panel when driving at fect and thus avert the collision when driving a speed of between approximately 30 km/h at a speed of between approximately 5 km/h Monitoring system Front As- (18 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph) (3 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Front as- ››› Fig. 188. sist only acts while the brake pedal is press- sist* ed down hard. The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At Introduction WARNING the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a The intelligent technology in the Front Assist The Front Assist Monitoring system helps to possible emergency braking ››› . cannot change the laws of physics. The driver prevent rear collisions. Critical warning is always responsible for braking in time. If The Front Assist can warn the driver of colli- the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de- sion hazards, prepare the vehicle for emer- If the driver fails to react to the advance pending on the traffic circumstances, you gency braking in case of danger, assist the warning, the system may actively intervene in must brake immediately or dodge the obsta- driver on braking and cause automatic brak- the brakes when driving at a speed of be- cle. ing. tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the 210 km/h (130 mph), generating a brief jolt vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- The Front Assist is not a replacement for to warn of the imminent collision. bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. driver awareness. ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- Automatic braking dents and serious injuries. Distance warning If the driver also fails to react to the advance ● In complex driving situations, the Front As- If the system detects that safety is endan- warning, the system may brake the vehicle sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in- gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front, automatically, by progressively increasing tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in it may warn the driver by means of a message braking effect driving at a speed of between traffic islands. on the instrument panel when driving at a approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) and 210 km/h ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- speed of between approximately 60 km/h (130 mph). By reducing speed in case of a paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra- (37 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph) possible collision, the system may contribute dar sensor has lost its settings, the system ››› Fig. 188. to reducing the consequences of an accident. may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inopportunely in the braking. The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. 176 Driver assistance systems

● During driving, the Front Assist does not re- On-screen warning lamps and mes- Radar sensor act to people or animals or vehicles crossing sages your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. ● The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle. data Technical

Note ● When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”. Advice ● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing Fig. 189 On the front bumper: radar sensor. the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display: ● If the Front Assist does not work as descri- Warning indications. A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several er to determine the traffic situation times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the Distance warning ››› Fig. 189 1 . This sensor can detect vehi- system checked by a specialised workshop. cles in front up to a distance of approximately Operation SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will 120 m. appear on the instrument panel display The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired . by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental influences such as rain or mist. In this case the WARNING Front Assist monitoring system does not work. The instrument panel displays the fol- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning Emergencies and control lamps on page 98. lowing message: Front Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the radar sensor ››› . Note When the radar sensor begins to operate When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-

cations on the instrument panel screen may properly again, the Front Assist will automati- Safety be concealed by warnings from other func- cally be available again. The message will tions, such as an incoming call. disappear from the instrument panel display. »

177 Operation

Front Assist operation may be affected by a ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. cur, for example, in a closed car park or due ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- on the road or sheets used in road works). mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- The area in front of and around the radar sen- pose. sor should not be covered with adhesives, ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the additional or similar headlights, as this may ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer negatively affect Front Assist operation. spray. If structural modifications are made to the ve- Fig. 191 On the turn signal and main beam hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- Operating the Front Assist monitoring headlight lever: button for the driver assis- ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As- tance systems sist operation may be affected. So structural system modifications should only be made by speci- The Front Assist monitoring system is active alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting whenever the ignition is switched on. a SEAT dealership for this purpose. When the Front Assist is switched off, so too If work is done incorrectly on the front of the are the advance warning function (pre warn- vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged ing) and the distance warning. or lose its settings, and Front Assist operation may be affected. So repair work should SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- only be made by specialised workshops. ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 179, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership Switching the Front Assist Monitoring Sys- for this purpose. tem off in the following situations.

CAUTION Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display: Switching the Front Assist monitoring sys- Front Assist switched off message. tem on and off If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- With the ignition switched on, the Front As- connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos- sist can be switched on and off as follows: sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. ● Select the corresponding menu option us- ● The sensor may become damaged or lose ing the button for the driver assistance sys- its settings when knocked, for example, dur- tems ››› Fig. 191.

178 Driver assistance systems

● OR: switch the system on or off in the Easy The system will store the setting for the next System limitations Connect system with the button  and the time the ignition is switched on. function buttons  and Driver Assist The Front Assist Monitoring System has cer- SEAT recommends keeping the distance ›››  page 21. tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- warning switched on at all times. tem. Thus, in certain circumstances some of When the Front Assist monitoring system is the system's reactions may be inopportune data Technical switched off, the instrument panel will inform or be delayed from the driver's standpoint. that it has been switched off with the follow- Switching the Front Assist Monitoring So pay attention in order to intervene if nec- ing indicator  ››› Fig. 190. System off in the following situations essary.

Switching the advance warning function on In the following situations the Front Assist The following conditions may cause the Front Advice or off Monitoring System should be deactivated Assist Monitoring System not to react or do The pre-warning function can be switched on due to the system's limitations ››› : so too late: or off in the Easy Connect system with the ● When the vehicle is to be towed. ● On taking tight bends. button  and the function buttons  and ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. Driver Assist ›››  page 21. ● When the radar sensor is damaged. ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- The system will store the setting for the next

aged. Operation time the ignition is switched on. ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision. ● If the ASR has been manually disconnec- SEAT recommends keeping the advance ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. ted. warning function switched on at all times. ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily ● If the ESC is controlling. Switching distance warning on and off with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- ditional headlight or the like. trically connected trailer are damaged. If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. Emergencies appear on the instrument panel display ferry or train. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the . In this case, increase the safe dis- road or sheets used in road works. WARNING tance. ● If the vehicle is reversing. If the Front Assist is not switched off in the The distance warning function can be activa- ● If the vehicle over-accelerates. situations described, serious accidents and Safety ted or deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- injuries may occur. ● In case of snow or heavy rain. tem with the button  and the function but- ● ● tons  and Driver Assist ›››  page 21. Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa- In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- tions. bikes. »

179 Operation

● Misaligned vehicles. Easy Connect system with the button  and laws of physics. The driver is always respon- ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. the function buttons  and Driver Assist sible for braking in time. ›››  page 21. ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the tion. The City Emergency braking function picks vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- up, at speeds between 5 km/h (3 mph) and bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- 30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the traffic ● hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards The City Emergency braking function alone situation in front of the vehicle up to a dis- cannot prevent accidents or serious injury. or over the top. tance of about 10 m. ● In complex driving situations, the City If the system detects a possible collision with Emergency braking function may issue unnec- a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares essary warnings and intervene inopportunely City Emergency braking function in braking, such as in work areas or if there for a possible emergency braking . ››› are metal rails. If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- ● If the operation of the City Emergency brak- sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt matically, by progressively increasing braking or because the radar sensor has lost its set- effect driving to reduce speed in the event of tings, the system may issue unnecessary a collision. The system can thus help to re- warnings and intervene inopportunely in the duce the consequences of an accident. braking. ● During driving, the City Emergency braking Status display function does not react to people or animals or vehicles crossing your path or which ap- Automatic deceleration by means of the City proach you head-on in the same lane. Emergency braking function is displayed on Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display: ad- the instrument panel by means of the advance warning message vance warning ››› Fig. 1921). Note The City Emergency braking function is part ● When the City Emergency braking function of the Front Assist monitoring and is active WARNING causes a braking, the brake pedal is “hard- whenever the system is switched on. The smart technology included in the City er”. Emergency braking function cannot defy the ● Automatic interventions on the brakes by Depending on the equipment, the pre-warn- the City Emergency braking function may be ing function can be switched on or off in the

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour. 180 Driver assistance systems

interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera- The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re- The Start-Stop system works under complex tor or moving the wheel. duce harmful and CO2 emissions. driving conditions that are difficult to detect without specialist technology. The set of nec- ● The City Emergency braking function can The system is automatically switched on ev- essary conditions for the correct operating of brake the vehicle until it stops completely. ery time the ignition is switched on. However, the brake system does not halt the the Start-Stop system are indicated below. vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake! The system automatically switches off the en- data Technical gine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. wait- ● If several inopportune intervenes occur, Conditions for automatic engine shut down ing at traffic lights. switch off the Front Assist and with it the City (Stop phase) Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe- The current status of the Start-Stop system is ● Selector lever in neutral. cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting displayed on the general instrument panel ● Clutch pedal not pressed. a SEAT dealership. display. Advice ● ● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc- Driver with seat belt fastened. cur, the City Emergency braking function may Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase) ● Driver door closed. switch off automatically. – Stop the vehicle (if necessary using the ● The bonnet closed. handbrake). ● Vehicle stationary. – Shift to neutral. ● The factory-fitted towing bracket is not elec-

Start-Stop System* trically connected to a trailer. Operation – Release the clutch pedal. ● Engine at operating temperature. Operating Automatic engine start up (Start phase) ● Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged. – Press the clutch. ● Vehicle not on a very steep slope ● Engine speed below 1,200 rpm. Switching the Start-Stop system on and off ● Vehicle battery temperature is neither too The Start-Stop system can be switched on high nor too low. Emergencies and off by pressing the  ››› Fig. 193 but- ● Sufficient brake system pressure. ton. ● Difference between outside temperature The warning lamp in the button will light up and set interior temperature not too great when the system is switched off. ● Vehicle speed since the last time the en- Safety If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the but- gine started was above 3 km/h (2 mph). Fig. 193 Instrument panel: Start-Stop system ton is pressed, the engine will start immedi- ● Particulate filter not being cleaned button ately. ››› page 164. »

181 Operation

● Front wheels not overly turned (steering START-STOP IMPOSSI- Engine cannot be auto- Tiredness detection (break rec- wheel turned less than three quarters of a BLE matically shut down turn) ommendation)* START-STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase) Conditions for engine start up (Start phase) Introduction SWITCH OFF IGNITION Switch the ignition off ● Clutch pedal pressed. The Fatigue detection informs the driver ● Max./min. temperature set. START MANUALLY Start the engine manually when their driving behaviour shows signs of ● Windscreen defrost function switched on. fatigue. WARNING ● High blower speed. ● WARNING ● Start-Stop button pressed. If the engine is switched off, neither the brake servo nor the power steering will work. Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue detection system tempt you into taking any Conditions for automatic engine start up ● Do not move the vehicle when the engine is switched off. risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- without driver involvement cient in length when making long journeys. ● Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h ● The driver always assumes the responsibil- CAUTION (2 mph). ity of driving to their full capacity. ● Difference between outside temperature Switch off the Start-Stop system ››› page 166 ● Never drive if you are tired. before driving through a pool of water on the and interior temperature is too great ● road. The system does not detect the tiredness of ● Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged. the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section ››› page 183, System ● Insufficient brake system pressure. Note limitations. If the driver seat belt is unfastened for more ● The battery temperature may reflect ● In some situations, the system may incor- than 30 seconds in Stop phase, the engine changes in outside temperature after several rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- must be started using the ignition key. hours. If the vehicle has been stopped out- vre as driver tiredness. Please observe the messages on the general side at temperatures below zero or in direct ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- instrument panel display. sunlight, for example, the battery tempera- fect called microsleep! ture may take several hours to reach the val- ● Please observe the indications on the in- ues required for the correct operating of the strument panel and act as is necessary. Warnings on the instrument panel display Start-Stop system. (valid for vehicles not fitted with an informa- ● tive display) If the Climatronic system is operating automatically, this could impair automatic engine FAULT: Start-Stop Fault in the Start-Stop sys- shut down under certain conditions. tem 182 Driver assistance systems

Note shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● When cornering pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● On roads in poor condition ● Fatigue detection has been developed for stores the last message displayed. driving on motorways and well paved roads ● In unfavourable weather conditions The message on the instrument panel display only. ● When a sporty driving style is employed ● If there is a fault in the system, have it can be switched off by pressing the  ● In the event of a serious distraction to the data Technical checked by a specialised workshop. button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button  on the multi function steering driver wheel  . ››› page 23 Fatigue detection will be restored when the Function and operation The message can be recalled to the instru- vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,

ment panel display using the multifunction when the ignition is switched off or when the Advice display ›››  page 23. driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door. Conditions of operation In the event of slow driving during a long pe- Driving behaviour is only calculated on riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to system automatically re-establishes the tired- around 200 km/h (125 mph). ness calculation. When driving at a faster

speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- Operation Switching on and off ted. Fatigue detection can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system with the Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: fa- button  and the function button  tigue detection symbol. ››› page 99. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been activated. Emergencies Fatigue detection determines the driving behaviour of the driver when starting a journey, System limitations making a calculation of tiredness. This is The Fatigue detection has certain limitations constantly compared with the current driving inherent to the system. The following condi- behaviour. If the system detects that the driv-

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- Safety er is tired, an audible warning is given with a vent it from functioning. sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) instrument panel display ››› Fig. 194. The ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) message on the instrument panel display is 183 Operation Towing bracket device Trailer weight tude, this also reduces climbing ability, which requires a reduction of the weight of Trailer weight the vehicle with a trailer by 10% for every Driving with a trailer The combined vehicle and trailer must be 1000 m increase in altitude. The weight of balanced. To do so use the maximum permit- the assembly is calculated by adding the ve- Technical requirements ted towing bracket load. An insufficient hicle weight (loaded) to the trailer weight weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the (loaded). Always drive with special care when If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing ball joint of the towing bracket will have a towing a trailer. bracket or is equipped with a selection of negative impact upon the response of the ve- SEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the rel- The towed load and support load information hicle-trailer assembly on the road. evant technical and legal requirements. that is displayed on the towing bracket man- ufacturers label are only values for the verifi- In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possi- Weight distribution cation of the device. The correct figures for ble to remove the ball joint, situated (togeth- Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy your specific vehicle, which are usually lower er with the special assembly instructions) in objects are as near to the axle as possible. than these figures, are given in the documen- the housing for the spare wheel in the vehi- Ensure that the objects do not move. tation of your vehicle. cle luggage compartment ››› page 75, Vehicle tool kit*. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer WARNING loaded then the load distribution is incorrect. ● Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power However, if these conditions cannot be avoi- Exceeding the maximum established load per axle and the maximum towing bracket socket for the electrical connection between ded, drive very slowly. the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer you load in addition to the maximum permitted are going to use has a 7-pin connector, the load or the load of the vehicle + trailer as- Tyre pressure values corresponding adaptor, acquired from the sembly can cause accidents and serious inju- SEAT Original Accessories Catalogue, can be Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to ries. used. “total load” ››› page 216, Useful life of tyres. ● A sliding load can considerably affect the stability and safety of the vehicle + trailer as- If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the Trailer weight sembly, resulting in accidents and serious in- car, it must be done according to the instruc- juries. tions of the towing bracket manufacturer. Never exceed the authorised trailer weight under any circumstances ››› page 221, Tech- Note nical specifications. Any queries that may arise can be directed to The trailer weights listed are only applicable an authorised SEAT dealer. for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. Due to lower air density, engine power decreases depending on the increase in alti- 184 Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer descending a slope in order to take advant- Please observe the following indications age of the engine brake. ››› page 208, Control lamp. Exterior mirrors The coolant temperature can be reduced by Check whether you can see enough of the The trailer is incorporated into the vehicle's switching on the heating. road behind the trailer with the standard rear anti-theft alarm system: vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you ● When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti- WARNING data Technical should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. theft alarm and a towing bracket. ● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf- Observe the relevant statutory requirements ● When the trailer is electrically connected to fic conditions. of the country you are in. the vehicle via the towing bracket socket. ● An electrical installation that is connected

● incorrectly or by non-specialised personnel Advice Headlights When the vehicle electrical device and the towing bracket are operational. can prevent the connection of the current to Before starting a journey, also check the the trailer and cause faults in the operation of ● When the vehicle is locked and the vehi- headlight beam settings with the trailer the electrical system throughout the entire cle's anti-theft alarm device is activated. hitched up. Adjust the headlight range set- vehicle, leading to accidents and serious injury. tings if necessary ››› page 117, Main light Once the electrical connection is interrupted range control . with the vehicle trailer locked, the alarm ● All electrical work must be carried out only by specialised services.

sounds. Operation Driving speed ● Never directly connect the trailer electrical Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarm device to the electrical sockets of the reverse For your own safety do not drive faster than device before connecting or disconnecting a the maximum permitted speed indicated on driving lights or other sources of electrical trailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm device current. the trailer. could cause the alarm to sound ››› page 112, At all times, immediately reduce speed if you Anti-theft alarm system*. CAUTION detect the slightest swaying movement of the trailer. Never try to “return the trailer to a Engine overheating ● Avoid corners, and sudden and sharp brak- Emergencies ing. straight position” by accelerating. In the event that the coolant temperature gauge needle moves to the right section of ● Once the trailing arm has been removed, Brakes the scale or to the red area, immediately replace the corresponding cover on the hole of the fastening point. This prevents dirt from Brake in due course! If the trailer has an over- duce speed. If the control lamp  flashes on entering the hole – see the trailer system as- Safety the general instrument panel, stop the vehi- run brake, apply the brakes gently at first and sembly manual. » then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that cle and switch off the engine. Wait several can be caused by locking of trailer wheels. minutes and check the coolant level in the Change to a lower gear in good time before tank ››› page 208. 185 Operation

Note WARNING Description ● In the event of frequent journeys with a ● Before driving with the ball-headed bar fit- trailer, we recommend also having the vehi- ted, verify its correct assembly and place- cle inspected in between the service inter- ment in the clamping bush. vals. ● Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is not ● When connecting and disconnecting the correctly placed and fixed in the clamping trailer, the handbrake must be applied. bush. ● For technical reasons, trailers with LED re- ● Do not use the towing device for towing if it verse lights cannot be incorporated into the is damaged or has missing parts. vehicle anti-theft alarm system. ● Do not modify or adapt the towing device connection. ● Never disengage the ball-headed bar with Towing bracket device for trail- the trailer still hitched. er CAUTION Introduction Be careful not to damage the paint on the bumper when handling the ball-headed bar. If the vehicle is equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory or is a genuine SEAT accessory, it meets all national technical and legal requirements for towing. Fig. 195 Towing bracket device support for Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power hitching/ball-headed bar. socket for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the towing The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is loca- bracket is equipped with a 7-pin connector, ted in the spare wheel compartment or in the you can use the corresponding available spare wheel compartment in the boot adaptor that is a genuine SEAT accessory. ››› page 75, Vehicle tool kit*. The towing device has a maximum vertical Key to ››› Fig. 195 load of 50 kg. 1 13-pin socket 2 Safety flange

186 Towing bracket device

3 Clamping bush Placing in service position 4 Clamping bush cap 5 Ball head cover 6 Ball-headed bar

7 Locking balls data Technical 8 Centred 9 Red marking on the manual regulator 10 Manual regulator

11 Key Advice 12 Key slot cover 13 Red marking on the manual regulator 14 White marking on the ball-headed bar

Note Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you Operation lose your key.

Fig. 197 Service position.

Fig. 196 Placing in service position. Before assembling, place the ball-headed bar in service position. Emergencies – Turn key A fully in the direction of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 196. – Hold the ball-headed bar with your left hand.

– Pull manual regulator B outward in the di- Safety rection of arrow 2 and turn it fully in the direction of arrow 3 . »

187 Operation

The manual regulator will remain in this posi- Assembly of the ball-headed bar tion.

Service position ››› Fig. 197

● Key C is in an open position – the key arrow points to the “unlocked” symbol. The key cannot be removed from the key slot. ● The D locking balls may be fully inserted into the body of the ball-headed bar by applying some pressure. Fig. 199 Placing the key slot cover. ● The red E marking on the manual regulator points towards the white marking on the – Remove the cap from the clamping bush 4 ball-headed bar. ››› Fig. 195 by pulling downwards. ● Between the manual regulator and the – Place the ball-headed bar in the service po- body of the ball-headed bar there is a clearly sition ››› page 187. visible space of approximately 4 mm F . – Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath Once the ball-headed bar has been posi- ››› Fig. 198 and push it into the clamping tioned like this, it will be ready to be placed bush as far as possible until you hear it in the clamping bush. click into place ››› . The manual regulator A automatically turns WARNING Fig. 198 Placing the ball-headed bar/locking in the opposite direction, adjusting to the Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot be and removing the key. ball-headed bar ››› . correctly placed in the service position. – Switch off the manual regulator lock with key B by turning the key fully to the right CAUTION in the direction of arrow 1 – the arrow in The key cannot be removed from the manual the key displays the “locked” symbol. regulator key slot when it is in the service po- – Remove the key in the direction of arrow sition. 2 . – Place cover C over the manual regulator lock in the direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 199.

188 Towing bracket device

– Verify the correct placement of the ball- Verification of correct placement WARNING headed bar ››› page 189. Only use the towing bracket device when the ball-headed bar is properly fitted! WARNING ● Do not hold the manual regulator with your hand when fitting the ball-headed bar since data Technical you could sustain injuries to your fingers. ● When mounting the ball-headed bar, always lock it with a key and remove the key from the slot. ● The ball-headed bar must not be in the Advice service position with the key in the key slot. Fig. 200 Correct placement of the ball-head- ● If the ball-headed bar is not placed in the ed bar. service position you will not be able to place it in the clamping bush. Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it is correctly fitted. CAUTION Ensure that: Operation When removing the key, always place the cover over the key slot of the manual regula- ● The ball-headed bar does not come out of tor to prevent dirt from entering. the clamping bush in a “jerky” manner. ● The red mark A ››› Fig. 200 on the manual Note regulator signals toward the white mark on the ball-headed bar. Once removed, place the clamping bush cap Emergencies in an appropriate location in the boot. ● The manual regulator is adjusted to the ball-headed bar, leaving no space between them. ● The regulator is locked and the key has been removed. Safety ● Cover B has been placed over the manual regulator lock.

189 Operation

Disassembly of the ball-headed bar The ball-headed bar should be placed in the service position so that it is ready to be inserted into the clamping bush ››› . – Place the cover over the clamping bush 4 ››› Fig. 195.

WARNING

● Never leave the ball-headed bar unsecured in the boot. It could be damaged in the event Fig. 202 Unblock the ball-headed bar. of sudden braking, putting the safety of passengers at risk! – Remove cover A from over the regulator ● Never disassemble the ball-headed bar key slot in the direction of arrow 1 with the trailer still hitched. ››› Fig. 201. – Insert key B in the key slot. CAUTION – Open the manual regulator lock by turning ● If you do not turn the manual regulator key B fully to the left in the direction of ar- fully, it will return to its original position row 2 . The arrow on the key points to the when the ball-headed bar is removed. The “unlocked” symbol. manual regulator will be stuck to the ball- headed bar and you will not be able to put it – Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath in the service position. Therefore, before you Fig. 201 Remove the key slot cover/unlock ››› Fig. 202 and remove manual regulator assemble it again, you must place the ball- with the key. C with your other hand in the direction of headed bar in this position. arrow 3 . ● When disassembling, place the cap on the – Turn the removed regulator fully in the di- clamping bush holder’s key slot. This way you will prevent dirt from entering the clamp- rection of arrow 4 and hold it firmly in this ing bush. position. – Remove the ball-headed bar from the Note clamping bush, pulling downward in the direction of arrow 5 . ● Before disassembling the ball-headed bar, we recommend placing the cover on the ball head.

190 Towing bracket device

● Clean the ball-headed bar thoroughly before returning it to the on-board toolbox.

Use and maintenance Technical data Technical

Cover the clamping bush with the cap to prevent dirt from entering. Before hooking on the trailer, check the ball

head and, if necessary, lubricate it with ade- Advice quate lubricant. Place the protective cover over the ball head when storing the bar. This way, you will avoid getting the boot dirty. If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clamping bush thoroughly with an appropriate prod- Operation uct.

CAUTION The top part of the clamping bush opening is lubricated. Be careful not to remove this lu- brication. Emergencies Safety

191 Advice

Advice SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can be of SEAT original spare parts and accessories carried out appropriately. has been verified. ● Despite the continuous observation of the Care and maintenance Vehicle improvements and modifications market, we cannot judge nor guarantee the The owner must keep the technical documen- suitability of other products for your vehicle, Accessories and modifications tation regarding the modifications carried out be they authorised products or products ap- on the vehicle so it can be handed over to proved by a state testing facility. to the vehicle those responsible for processing end-of-life vehicles. This ensures end-of-life processing Note Accessories, replacement parts and of the vehicle, while protecting the environ- repair work SEAT original spare parts and accessories can ment. be purchased at authorised SEAT dealers where the purchased parts can also be fitted. If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehi- Work done on the electrical components and cle, or if a part of the vehicle has been re- software can cause disruption in operations. placed by a new part or technical modifica- Due to the interconnection of electronic com- tions are required, the following instructions ponents, their malfunction can also impair Modifications and effects of the air- must be taken into account: systems that are not directly affected. This bag system can adversely affect reliability of the vehicle, ● Before purchasing accessories or spare and can produce excessive wear of the parts. In the adjustment and modification, respect parts and making technical modifica- before Damage caused by technical modifications the SEAT directive. tions, always request advice from an Author- that are not made with the consent of SEAT ised SEAT dealer ››› . Modifications and corrections of the front will be excluded from the warranty – see war- bumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodywork ● In the event that technical modifications ranty certificate. must be carried out at authorised SEAT work- are carried out on the vehicle, the instruc- shops. Components of the airbag system can tions and regulations specified by the com- WARNING be found in these parts of the vehicle. pany, SEAT, must be observed. ● Jobs or modifications unduly carried out on No damage will be caused to the vehicle if your vehicle can cause disruption to opera- WARNING the established procedures are respected, tions - Risk of accident! ● Airbag modules must never be repaired. which guarantees safe driving and operation. ● We recommend that you use only expressly They must be replaced. After the modifications are carried out, the authorised SEAT Accessories and SEAT Origi- ● Never fit components of the airbag system vehicle will comply with the restrictions and nal Spare Parts for your vehicle. The reliabili- removed from old vehicles or those originat- regulations of the highway code. More infor- ty, safety and compatibility with your vehicle ing from a recycling process in the vehicle. mation can be obtained at an Authorised

192 Care and maintenance

● The modification of the suspension of the warranty claims in the event of corrosion or ● Cleaning products containing solvents may vehicle wheels, including the use of non-per- paint defects. damage the material being cleaned. mitted combinations of tyres and rims can al- We recommend you use cleaning products ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ter the operation of the airbag system and in- from the SEAT Original Accessories pro- Risk of damage to paintwork. crease the risk of serious or fatal injuries in gramme available in SEAT dealers. Please fol- ● If washing the vehicle with a hose in win- an accident. data Technical low the instructions for use on the packag- ter, do not direct the jet of water directly at ● During all jobs on the airbag system, in ad- ing. the locks or at the door seals or bonnet. Risk dition to the removal and fitting of parts of of freezing. the system in the course of other repair jobs, WARNING ● parts of the airbag system can be damaged. Do not use sponges for removing insects or ● Cleaning products and other materials used abrasive household sponges, etc. on painted

Therefore in the event of an accident, this Advice may cause the airbags to activate incorrectly for car care can damage the health if mis- surfaces. Risk of damage to the painted sur- or not activate at all. used. face! ● Always keep car care materials in a safe ● Do not put stickers on the inner side of the place out of the reach of children. Risk of poi- rear window in areas where heating elements soning! or the aerial are located. This could cause Radio and aerial reception damage and, in the case of the aerial, radio ● When washing the car during the winter and navigation system reception faults. season: Moisture and ice on the brakes may In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio or Operation affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident! ● Do not clean the inside of the window with navigation system, the aerial may be instal- sharp objects or corrosive or acidic cleaning led in different places: ● The ignition must always be switched off products. Risk of damaging the heating ele- ● inside the rear window next to the heating when the car is washed. Risk of accident! ments or the aerial. elements, ● Do not clean the underside of the car or in- ● Do not attach any fragrance or air freshener side the wheel arches without protecting your ● on the roof of the vehicle. to the dash panel. Risk of damage to the hands and arms. You may cut yourself on dash panel!

sharp metal parts! Emergencies ● To avoid damaging the parking aid system ● Perfumes and air fresheners inside the ve- sensors, spray them only briefly at a mini- Care and cleaning hicle may be harmful to health at high tem- mum distance of 10 cm when cleaning the ve- peratures in the interior. hicle with a high-pressure or steam cleaner. Introduction ● Do not clean the roof panel with a brush.

CAUTION Risk of damage to the panel surface! » Safety Regular and suitable care helps to maintain ● Check the colour-fastness of your clothing the useful life of your vehicle. This may also to avoid damaging or visibly staining the fab- be one of the requirements for upholding any ric (leather), upholstery and fabric trim.

193 Advice

For the sake of the environment ● Environmental conditions Washing by hand

● The packaging of the product used to care The longer substances such as insects, bird When washing the car by hand, use plenty of for your vehicle is hazardous waste. It must droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in- water to soften the dirt first and rinse off as be disposed of according to current local law. dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and well as possible. ● Only wash the car in special wash bays. other aggressive materials remain on the paintwork, the more damage they do. High Then clean the vehicle with a sponge, glove or brush. Start on the roof and work down. Note temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect. Use only slight pressure when cleaning the ● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth- painted surfaces of the vehicle. A car sham- er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar After the winter season, it is important to poo should only be used for very persistent stains on the fabric (leather), upholstery and have the underside of the vehicle washed dirt. fabric trim as soon as possible. thoroughly. Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of- ● We recommend that you visit an authorised ten. SEAT dealer to clean and care for the interior of your vehicle, due to the problems that may car washes Wheels, sills and underside should be arise when cleaning and caring for the interi- cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this. or of your vehicle and to the utensils and Your vehicle can be washed in an automatic After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly knowledge required. car wash. and then dry with a chamois. Before going through an automatic car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such as Washing the vehicle closing the windows, etc. Washing with high-pressure cleaners The best protection of the vehicle from the If the vehicle has special accessories such as harmful influences of the environment in- spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres- volves frequent washing and waxing. The fre- etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- quency with which the vehicle is washed de- operator beforehand. structions for the equipment. This particular- pends on many different factors, such as: ly applies to the operating pressure and the The windscreen wiper rubbers must be de- distance of the spray from the surface of the ● Frequency of use greased after going after the car wash and vehicle. Do not hold the spray nozzle too waxing. ● Type of parking (garage, underneath trees, close to the parking aid system sensors and etc.) soft materials, such as rubber hoses or insu- lating material. ● Time of year ● Weather conditions

194 Care and maintenance

WARNING ● Moisten the camera lens using a standard ble to protect the paint with a coat of wax at alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and least twice a year. Do no use a nozzle that sprays the water out clean the lens with a dry cloth. in a direct stream or one that has a “rotating Polishing jet”! CAUTION Polishing is only necessary if the paint has ● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be data Technical CAUTION washer: brought back by applying wax. Do not use water hotter than +60°C (140°F). – Stay a suitable distance from the sensors The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if Risk of damage to the vehicle! on the front and rear bumpers. the polish used does not contain wax com- – Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-

pounds to seal the paint. Advice rounding area with the pressure washer. Stickers attached by the factory ● Never use warm or hot water to remove CAUTION snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, ● Never wax the windows. Follow these directions to avoid damaging as it could crack the lens. the stickers: ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- ● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic lens. ● Do not use high pressure cleaners. parts. ● To remove ice or snow from the stickers do ● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or Operation not use window scrapers or ice scrapers. dusty environment. Vehicle paint waxing and polishing ● Do not polish the stickers. ● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges. Care Cleaning of chromed parts ● Preferably wash using a soft sponge and To a great extent, good waxing protects the soft neutral soap. vehicle surface from the harmful effects of Clean the chrome first with a clean cloth and Emergencies the environment. then buff up with a soft, dry cloth. If this does The vehicle must be treated with a high qual- not clean the chrome properly, use a special Sensors and camera lenses ity, hard wax when water no longer forms chrome cleaner. droplets on clean paintwork. ● Use a small brush to remove snow and a CAUTION de-icer spray to remove ice. A new coat of high quality, hard wax can be Safety applied to the clean, painted surface only Do not polish the chrome in a dusty environ- ● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- ment or it could be scratched. uct and a soft, dry cloth. when it has fully dried. Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisa-

195 Advice

Damage to the paint The windows should also be cleaned on the tective paint and cause the headlights to inside at regular intervals. crack. Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the ● Do not use aggressive cleaning products or or stone chips, should be touched up without windows and rear vision mirrors. chemical solvents to clean the glass. This delay using paint. could damage the headlights. Do not use the chamois used to polish the Suitable touch-up brushes or sprays for the bodywork to dry the windows. Waxing and colour of your vehicle can be purchased from polishing residues could cause smears on authorised SEAT dealers. the glass and hinder visibility. Caring for rubber seals Note CAUTION The weatherstrips on doors and windows will We recommend you leave paint damage re- remain pliable and last longer if they are oc- ● Never use hot or boiling water to remove pairs to a SEAT Authorised Service. casionally treated with a suitable rubber care snow and ice from the windows. Risk of crack- product. This will prevent premature ageing ing glass! and leaks. If they are properly cared for, the ● Make sure you do not damage the paint- seals will be less likely to freeze up in the Plastic parts work on the vehicle on removing snow and winter. ice from the windows and rear vision mirrors. Exterior plastic parts will come clean using a ● Do not remove the snow or ice dirty with damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, plastic thick particles, e.g. gravel, sand or road salt, Door lock cylinder parts can also be treated with special sol- from windows and mirrors. Risk of damage to vent-free plastic cleaning detergents. the glass and mirror surfaces. Special products must be used to defrost Do not use paint cleaners, polishes or wax on lock cylinders. plastic parts. Headlights Note ● Make sure, when washing the vehicle, that Use soap and clean, hot water to clean the Windows and mirrors the least amount of water possible enters the front headlights. lock cylinders. Remove snow and ice from windows and rear ● We recommend the use of products from vision mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To CAUTION the selection of SEAT Original Accessories to avoid damaging the surface of the glass, the ● Never rub the headlights to dry them and care for the door lock cylinder. scraper should only be pushed in one direc- do not use sharp objects to clean the plastic tion and not moved to and fro. glass material. These could damage the pro-

196 Care and maintenance

Wheels Vehicle underbody protection Cavity waxing

Wheel trims The underside of the vehicle is coated to per- All cavities on the vehicle exposed to corro- If you wash the vehicle regularly, you should manently protect it from chemical and me- sion are permanently factory-protected by a also thoroughly wash the wheel trim. Regu- chanical agents. wax solution. larly remove any brake dust and road salt Given that damage to the protective coating This wax solution does not need to be data Technical from the wheels, otherwise the wheel materi- during driving cannot be completely ruled checked or touched up. Should wax run out al could be damaged. Repair any damage to out, we recommend you check the condition of the cavities at high ambient temperatures, the wheel paintwork immediately. of the protective coating on the underbody remove it using a plastic scraper and clean and suspension at regular intervals, prefera- away any stains using lighter fluid. Alloy wheels bly before the start and end of the coldest Advice After thorough washing, treat the wheels season of the year. WARNING with a protective product for alloy wheels. Do Authorised SEAT dealers have suitable spe- Note the regulations concerning safety and not use abrasive products to care for the cial products and the necessary facilities and environmental protection if you use lighter wheels. are aware of the techniques required for their fluid to remove the wax. Risk of fire! application. We therefore recommend all WARNING

touch-up work or additional anti-corrosion Operation Moisture, ice and road salt may affect braking measures be performed by an authorised Leatherette and upholstery efficiency. Risk of accident! SEAT dealer. Leatherette can be cleaned with a damp WARNING cloth. If this is not sufficient, these parts CAUTION Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion should only be cleaned with solvent-free Heavy dirt on the wheels could lead to their coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con- plastic care and cleaning products. misalignment. This could result in vibrations verter, particulate filter or heat shields on the Emergencies being transmitted to the steering wheel that Textile covers and trim parts on doors, boot exhaust system. Once the engine has under certain conditions may cause prema- lid, etc. can be cleaned with special deter- reached operating temperature, these sub- ture steering wear. This dirt must be re- gents, e.g. dry foam. A soft sponge or brush stances could catch fire. Risk of fire! moved. or a micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning can be used. Use special products to clean the

Note headliner. » Safety We recommend you leave paint damage repairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.

197 Advice

The dye used in many garments, for example Removing stains ● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as dark jeans, is not always sufficiently colour- Remove fresh water-based stains such as cof- zips, rivets or belts can leave permanent fast. Seat upholstery (fabric and leather), es- fee, tea, juices, blood, etc. with an absorbent scratches and rough marks on the surface of pecially when light-coloured, may visibly dis- cloth or kitchen roll. Use the special deter- the leather. colour if the dye comes out of clothing, even gent to clean dried-on stains. ● Use of a mechanical steering wheel lock in normal conditions. This is not an uphols- can damage the leather surface of the steer- tery defect but indicates that the dye in the Remove fresh fat-based stains such as but- ing wheel. item of clothing is not solid enough. ter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an absorbent cloth or paper towel or use the special detergent if the stain has not yet soaked Note Heated seat upholstery through the surface. ● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul- tra-violet protection at regular intervals and Use a grease-dissolving product to treat Do not clean the seat upholstery with damp after cleaning. The cream will nourish and dried-in, fat-based stains. moisturise the leather, keep it supple and products, as this could damage the seat able to breathe. In addition, it will also help heating system. Treat less common stains such as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens, nail polish, to protect the surface of the leather. Clean the upholstery with special products, emulsion paint, shoe cream etc. with a spe- ● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and e.g. dry foam, etc. cial leather stain remover. remove fresh dirt as necessary. ● Preserve the colour of the leather. A special Leather care coloured cream for leather will renew the colour of more heavily worn areas as required. Natural leather The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with a leather-care prod- ● Leather is a natural material with specific Leather should be looked after from time to uct. properties. During vehicle use, the appear- time, depending on its use. ance of parts of the leather covers may Apply the protective product very sparingly. change; folds or wrinkles may appear as a result of their use. Normal cleaning Dry the leather with a soft, dry cloth. Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the leather surfaces. CAUTION Seat belts ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight More stubborn dirt for long periods so that it does not lose its Keep the seat belts clean! Do not let water soak through the leather or colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period penetrate the seams. outdoors, cover the leather so that it does Wash soiled seat belts with mild, soapy wa- not lose its colour. ter, removing any heavier dirt with a soft Dry it with a soft, dry cloth. brush. 198 Checking and refilling levels Check the condition of all seat belts at regu- Checking and refilling levels The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is in- lar intervals. dicated on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap, along with the tyre size and pres- Very soiled belts may not retract properly. Fuel sure ››› Fig. 203 . WARNING Refuelling Vehicles with a fuel cap with key data Technical ● The seat belts should never be removed from the vehicle for cleaning. – Press the flap in the direction of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 203. ● Never clean using chemical products, as chemical detergents destroy the fabric. En- – Open the cover in the direction indicated sure that the seat belts do not come into con- 2 by the arrow . Advice tact with corrosive fluids such as acids, etc. – Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, and unlock it using the ignition key, turning belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, it anti-clockwise. the belt in question must be replaced by an Official Service. – Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and ● Make sure that the inertia reel seat belts place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203 .

are completely dry before allowing them to Operation retract. – Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed tube as far as it will go. The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic filler nozzle cuts out ››› . – Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed

tube and place it back on the pump. Emergencies – Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks into place. Fig. 203 Vehicle as seen from the rear right: fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank un- – Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand

screwed cap attached. and lock it using the ignition key, turning it Safety clockwise. Read the additional information carefully – Press the tank flap with your hand to close ›››  page 39 it. »

199 Advice

– Check that the fuel flap is correctly closed. reasons, we do not recommend carrying a Types of petrol spare canister in the vehicle. The canister Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the side could be damaged in an accident and fuel The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the flap will unlock using the central locking sys- may leak. Risk of fire! fuel tank flap. tem) The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- – Once the vehicle has been unlocked using CAUTION verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- the central locking button, press the fuel ● Switch off the auxiliary heater (heater and rol. The petrol must comply with European flap in the direction of the arrow 1 independent heater) before filling the tank. Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN ››› Fig. 203. 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- ● The fuel tank is full as soon as the automat- fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of – Open the cover in the direction indicated ic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue fill- 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- by the arrow 2 . ing, as this will fill the expansion chamber. ated by their octane rating (RON). ● – Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and Never completely empty the tank! An irreg- The following titles appear on the corre- place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 203 ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults, which can result in damage to a substantial sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: . amount of engine parts and the exhaust sys- – Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed tem. Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- tube as far as it will go. ● If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of the tane unleaded petrol vehicle, it should be removed immediately. The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- Risk of damage to paintwork! filler nozzle cuts out ››› . rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. – Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed Note tube and place it back on the pump. There is no emergency mechanism for the Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 – Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces- octanes into place. sary, request assistance from specialised per- You should use super petrol with a minimum sonnel. – Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it of 95 octanes. click into place. If super is not available, in an emergency you Note – Check that the fuel flap is properly closed. may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres, of this case only use moderate engine speeds WARNING which 7 litres are the reserve. and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon Observe all relevant statutory regulations on as possible. transporting spare fuel canisters. For safety

200 Checking and refilling levels

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen Note tane unleaded petrol Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. ● You may use petrol with a high octane num- We recommend you use super plus 98 octane These additives can be bought at SEAT dealers, where information on how to use them ber than the one recommended for your en- petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- gine. can also be obtained. tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is Technical data Technical If super is not available, in an emergency you CAUTION not available, you may refuel with a fuel with may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In a low lead content. ● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the this case only use moderate engine speeds fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of as possible. metal additives. Using them may damage the Diesel fuel Advice engine! Please note the information on the inside of Petrol additives ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large the fuel tank flap. The quality of the fuel influences the behav- proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). iour, power and service life of the engine. This could damage the fuel system. We recommend the use of diesel fuel which This is why the petrol you use should carry ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or complies to European standard EN 590. If suitable additives already included by the fuel containing other metal additives would diesel fuel which meets European standard petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number Operation tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the converter. (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine fuel system clean and prevent deposits from ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap- is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- building up in the engine. proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- phur content of the fuel must be below 50 knock additives may contain metal additives parts per million. If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- that could seriously damage the engine or tives is not available or engine problems the catalytic converter. These additives must arise, the necessary additives must be added Winter-grade diesel

not be used. Emergencies when refuelling ››› . Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it ● High engine speed and full throttle can is more difficult to start the engine. For this Not all petrol additives have been shown to damage the engine when using petrol with an reason, petrol stations in some countries al- be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- octane rating lower than the correct grade for so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity ditives may cause significant damage to the the engine. when cold (winter-grade diesel). » engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- Safety ditives should never be used. Metal additives may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation ratings or octane ratings ››› . 201 Advice

1) Water in the fuel filter Engine compartment fore, after closing the bonnet always check If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is that it is properly secured. equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa- Introduction ● Should you notice that the bonnet is not rator, the instrument panel may display the safely secured when the vehicle is moving, following warning:  Water in the Read the additional information carefully stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident! fuel filter. If this is the case, take the ›››  page 11 ● vehicle to a specialised workshop so that Always be aware of the danger of injury and Keep children away from the engine compartment. they can drain the fuel filter. scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire when working in the engine compartment, ● Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk of CAUTION e.g. when checking and refilling fluids. burns! ● ● The vehicle is not designed for the use of Therefore, always observe the warnings and Never spill fluids on hot engine compart- FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would follow all general safety precautions. The en- ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. anti- be damaged if you used biodiesel. gine compartment is a dangerous area. freeze in coolant)! ● ● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called Take care not to cause short circuits in the “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with WARNING electrical system, especially when working on the battery. diesel fuel. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, ● ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be smoke or coolant escaping from the engine Never touch the radiator fan when the en- necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- compartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until no gine is hot. The fan may start running sud- quently than is specified in the Maintenance steam or coolant can be seen before opening denly! Programme. We recommend having this done the bonnet. ● Never cover the engine with additional in- by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed ● Switch off the engine and remove the key sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of to collect in the filter, this can cause engine from the ignition. fire! performance problems. ● Engage neutral in vehicles with manual ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- gearbox and move the selector lever to posi- pansion tank when the engine is hot. The tion P in vehicles with automatic gearbox. cooling system is under pressure! ● Apply the handbrake firmly. ● Protect face, hands and arms from any hot steam or hot coolant released by covering the ● Wait for the engine to cool down. cap with a large, thick rag when opening the ● For safety reasons, the bonnet must always expansion tank. be closed when the vehicle is moving. There- ● Do not leave any objects, such as cloths or tools, in the engine compartment.

1) Valid for the market: Algeria. 202 Checking and refilling levels

● When working underneath the vehicle, se- Otherwise this can cause serious malfunc- Opening and closing the bonnet cure it so that it cannot roll away and support tions or engine damage! it safely on suitable supports. The hydraulic ● Never open the bonnet using the release jack is not sufficient for this purpose. Risk of catch. Risk of damage! injuries!

● If any tests have to be performed with the data Technical For the sake of the environment engine running, there is an extra safety risk from rotating parts, such as the drive belt, al- Due to the environmentally-friendly disposal ternator and radiator fan, etc., and from the of fluids, the equipment necessary and the high-voltage ignition system. You should also knowledge required, let an authorised SEAT

note the following: dealer change fluids during service inspec- Advice – Never touch the electrical wiring of the tions of the vehicle. ignition system. – Keep away from moving engine parts Note when wearing jewellery, loose clothing or ● Please contact an authorised SEAT dealer long hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All jewel- with any doubts regarding fluids. lery must be removed, hair tied back and ● Fluids of the correct specifications can be

close-fitting clothing worn. Operation acquired from the selection of SEAT Original ● Observe the following additional warnings Accessories. if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary. – Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network. Fig. 204 Unlocking the bonnet. » – Do not smoke. – Never work near naked flames. Emergencies – Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediately available.

CAUTION Safety ● When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct filler opening.

203 Advice

Opening the bonnet Closing the bonnet – Open the front left door. – Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the support strut keeping the bonnet open and – Pull the lever 1 ››› Fig. 204 under the dash insert it into its fastening 3 . panel in the direction indicated by the arrow. – Let the bonnet drop from a height of around 20 cm into the catch Do not press Before opening the bonnet, make sure that down afterwards! the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted away from the glass. Otherwise the paint- – Check that the bonnet is correctly closed. work may be damaged. – Pull the release catch in the direction of the arrow 2 ››› Fig. 204 and the bonnet will be released. – Hold and lift the bonnet. – Remove the support strut 3 ››› Fig. 205 from its fastening in the direction of the arrow and secure the raised bonnet so that the end of the strut hooks onto the opening in the bonnet 4 .

Fig. 205 Locking the bonnet.

204 Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 206 Diagram for the location of the various elements. From time to time, the levels of the different Overview Engine oil fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never You will find further explanations, instruc- fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious tions and restrictions on the technical speci- General notes damage to the engine may be caused. fications as of ››› page 221. Operation 1 Coolant expansion tank ...... 208 The engine comes with a special, multi-grade Note oil that can be used all year round. 2 Window washer water tank ...... 210 The layout of the engine compartment is very Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- 3 Engine oil filler cap ...... 207 similar to all petrol and diesel engines. tial for the correct operation of the engine 4 Engine oil level dipstick ...... 207 and its long useful life, when topping up or 5 Brake fluid reservoir ...... 209 changing oil, use only those oils that comply Emergencies 6 Battery ...... 211 Radiator fan with VW standards. The specifications (VW standards) set out in The checking and replenishment of the serv- The radiator is driven by an electric motor the following page should appear on the con- ice fluids are carried out on the components and controlled according to the temperature tainer of the service oil; when the container mentioned above. These operations are de- of the coolant. displays the specific standards for petrol and scribed in the page 202. Safety ››› After the engine has been stopped and the diesel engines together, it means that the oil ignition switched off, the radiator fan may can be used for both types of engines. continue running for around 10 minutes. We recommend that the oil change indicated in the Maintenance Programme, be » 205 Advice

performed by a technical service or special- top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. ised workshop. vals ›››  page 40 (up to a maximum of 0.5 ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the litres). The correct oil specifications for your engine engine oil level is too low ››› page 207 and are listed in the ›››  page 40. you cannot obtain the oil specified for your Fixed service intervals* vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil Service intervals If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, service interval” or it has been disabled (by VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife request), you may use oils for fixed service ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- intervals, which also appear in tance travelled). ›››  page 40. In this case, your vehicle Note If the PR code that appears on the back of the must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 Before a long trip, we recommend finding an Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever engine oil that conforms to the correspond- this means that your vehicle has the LongLife comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1, gramme. ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is gine oil will always be available for a top-up if dependent on time/distance travelled. ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine needed. oil level is too low ››› page 207 and you can- Flexible service intervals (LongLife service not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can add a small quantity of oil conform- intervals*) Control lamp ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 Special oils and processes have been devel- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die- The control lamp  flashes red (oil pressure oped which, depending on the characteris- sel engines) (up to 0.5 l). tics and individual driving profiles, enable low) the extension of the oil change service (Long- Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* The informative display indicates: Life service intervals). The Maintenance Programme states whether Oil pressure. Switch off the en- Because this oil is essential for extending the your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate gine! Instruction Manual! service intervals, it must only be used ob- filter. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and serving the following indications: Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash check the engine oil level ››› page 207 ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service information, may be used in diesel engines If the symbol flashes although the oil level is tervals. equipped with particulate filter. Using other correct,  do not drive on. Do not even run ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- the engine at idle speed! engine oil level is too low ››› page 207 and tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- Go to a technical service. LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to fore: 206 Checking and refilling levels

The control lamp  lights up yellow (insuf- Checking engine oil level – Then pull the dipstick out again and check ficient oil level) the oil level.

The informative display indicates: It is normal for the engine to consume a cer- Check the oil level! tain amount of oil. Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle Technical data Technical Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 li- check the engine oil level ››› page 207 tres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can also If the bonnet remains open for more than 30 be higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles). seconds, the warning lamp switches off. If You should therefore check the oil level at the engine oil is not refilled, the warning regular intervals, ideally every time you fill Advice lamp illuminates again after 100 km (62 the tank or before setting off on a long trip. miles). Fig. 207 Engine oil dipsticks. CAUTION The control lamp  flashes yellow (oil level Read the additional information carefully sensor faulty) ● The oil level must never exceed area A ›››  page 40 ››› Fig. 207. Risk of damage to the exhaust The informative display indicates: The dipstick shows the engine oil level. system! Operation Oil sensor. Workshop! ››› Fig. 207. ● If the engine oil cannot be topped up under the given conditions,  do not drive on! Stop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, The Checking oil level the engine and seek the professional assis- warning lamp  flashes various times after tance of an Official Service, as this could the ignition is switched on and an audible – Park the vehicle on a level surface and en- cause serious damage to the engine. warning is given. sure the engine is at operating temperature. Go to a technical service. – Switch the ignition off. Topping up engine oil Emergencies – Open the bonnet. – Check the engine oil level ››› page 207, – Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to Checking engine oil level. flow back to the sump and remove the dip- – Unscrew the cap from the filler opening. stick. Safety – Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres at – Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in- a time ››› page 205. sert it again as far as it will go. – Check the oil level ››› page 207. » 207 Advice

– Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push acceleration and subjecting the engine to Wait for the engine to cool before opening the dipstick all the way in. high loads. the cover. If the warning lamp  (red) is lit up or flash- ● Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch on ing, the coolant temperature is too high or its automatically regardless of whether the igni- Changing engine oil level is too low. tion is switched on. Engine oil must be changed with the frequen- The informative display indicates: cy indicated in the Maintenance Programme Check coolant! Instruction Man- Checking coolant level or according to the service interval indicator ual! ›››  page 30. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, check CAUTION the coolant level ››› page 208 and refill if necessary ››› page 209. Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk of damage to the engine! Damage caused by If the coolant is situated in the prescribed these products is not covered by the warran- area, the high temperature may be due to a ty. fault in the cooling system fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and replace it if necessary Note ›››  page 43. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into If the warning lamp  (red) remains lit up, Fig. 208 Engine compartment: coolant fluid contact with engine oil. despite both the coolant level and the radiator fan fuse being in correct condition,  tank. stop the vehicle! Read the additional information carefully Coolant Go to a technical service. ›››  page 40 The coolant expansion tank is located in the WARNING Control lamp engine compartment of the vehicle. ● Take care when opening the coolant reser- – Switch the ignition off. If the warning lamp  (blue) is lit up, the en- voir. When the engine is warm or hot, the gine has not yet reached its operating tem- system is pressurised – Danger of burns! – Open the bonnet ››› page 202. perature1). Avoid high engine speeds, hard

1) This does not apply to vehicles equipped with an informative display. 208 Checking and refilling levels

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- Topping up the coolant level ● If splashed into eyes, rinse immediately pansion tank ››› Fig. 208. When the engine with clean water and seek immediate medical is cold, the coolant should be between – Switch the ignition off. attention. marks B (min.) and A (max.). When the – Wait for the engine to cool down. ● Seek immediate medical attention if the engine is hot, it may be slightly above mark coolant is accidentally ingested.

A (max.). – Cover the cap on the coolant expansion data Technical tank ››› Fig. 208 with a cloth and carefully If the coolant fluid level in the reservoir is too unscrew the cap. CAUTION low, this will be indicated by the  red warn- – Refill the level of coolant. If the coolant cannot be topped up under the ing lamp illuminating on the general dash given conditions,  do not drive on. We rec- panel ››› page 208, Control lamp. However, – Screw the cap on again until it clicks into ommend contacting an authorised SEAT deal- Advice we recommend checking the coolant level di- place. er, as this can damage the engine. rectly in the tank. Do not use a different type of additive if the Coolant fluid loss prescribed anti-freeze additive is not available, in the event of an emergency. In this Brake fluid Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak. case, use only water and bring the coolant It is not sufficient merely to top up the cool- concentration back up to the correct level as Checking brake fluid level ant. The cooling system should be inspected Operation soon as possible at an Official Service. by an Official Service without delay. Always top up with unused coolant. CAUTION Never fill the coolant tank above mark A ● In the event of a fault that causes the en- (max.) ››› Fig. 208 Excess coolant is forced gine to overheat, contact an authorised SEAT out of the cooling system through the over- dealer immediately, as this could damage the pressure valve in the filler cap of the expan- engine. sion tank when the engine heats up. Emergencies ● Anti-freeze that does not correspond to the correct specification may particularly affect WARNING corrosion protection considerably. ● The anti-freeze additive and, therefore, the ● Faults caused by corrosion may lead to entire coolant, are a health hazard. Avoid Fig. 209 Engine compartment: brake fluid coolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults! touching the coolant. Coolant fumes are also reservoir. Safety a health hazard. For this reason, always store the coolant additive in a safe place out of the Read the additional information carefully reach of children. Risk of poisoning! ›››  page 41 »

209 Advice

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- Changing the brake fluid Windscreen washer gine compartment of the vehicle. Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, it – Switch the ignition off. Topping up windscreen washer fluid gradually absorbs moisture from the atmos- – Open the bonnet ››› page 202. phere. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake system could corrode. – Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir The water content also reduces the boiling ››› Fig. 209. It should be between the “MIN” point of the brake fluid. and “MAX” marks.

The fluid level drops slightly after a period of The brake fluid must comply with one of the time due to automatic compensation for following standards or specifications: brake pad wear. This is quite normal. ● VW 50114 However, if the level goes down noticeably in ● FMVSS 116 DOT4 a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. If CAUTION Fig. 210 Engine compartment: windscreen the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. washer reservoir. low, this will be indicated by the warning Read the additional information carefully lamp illuminating on the instrument panel   ››› page 153, Control lamp. ››› page 41 The container for the windscreen washer con- WARNING tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or ● If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN rear window and the headlight washer sys- mark,  do not continue driving. Risk of acci- tem. The container is located in the engine dent! Go to a technical service. compartment. ● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va- The capacity of the reservoir is approximately pour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake 3.5 litres; in vehicles with a headlight washer system for too long. This would seriously af- system, it is approximately 5.4 litres1). fect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. Plain water on its own is not enough to clean the glass and the headlights properly. We

1) Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for both versions. 210 Checking and refilling levels therefore recommend using clean water with Battery WARNING a glass cleaning product to eliminate any stubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive in ● Battery acid is very corrosive, therefore, the Introduction battery must be handled with the utmost winter). care. Wear protective gloves and protect your Although your vehicle has heated windscreen Read the additional information carefully eyes and skin when handling batteries. The washer jets, anti-freeze should always be ›››  page 41. corrosive fumes in the air irritate and inflame data Technical added to the water in winter. the respiratory tract and cause conjunctivitis. Warning symbols on the battery It corrodes tooth enamel. Causes deep and Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner with difficult-to-heal wounds when it comes in anti-freeze is unavailable. The concentration Sym contact with the skin. Repeated contact with Meaning of ethanol must be no greater than 15 %. bol diluted acids causes skin disease (inflamma- Advice However, remember that anti-freeze in this tion, ulcers and fissures). When in contact proportion only protects down to -5°C  Always wear safety glasses! with water, acids dilute and develop a great (+23°F). deal of heat. Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Always wear  gloves and hearing protection! ● Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leak CAUTION out of the vapour vents. Protect your eyes Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered lights with glasses or a protective helmet! Risk of ● Never mix the windscreen washing water  and lit cigarettes away when working on the blindness! If acid should splash into the with anti-freeze used for the cooling system Operation battery! eyes, rinse the affected eye immediately for or other additives. several minutes using clean water. Then seek ● If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight A highly explosive mixture of gases is released  when the battery is under charge! medical care immediately. washer system, only mix in with the water a ● Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or detergent that does not damage polycarbon-  Keep children away from the battery! clothing with soap solution as quickly as pos- ates. sible and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid Incorrect handling of the vehicle battery is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im- Note could lead to damage. We therefore recom- mediately. Emergencies mend all work on the vehicle battery be per- When topping up the fluid, do not move the ● Keep children away from the battery. formed by an authorised SEAT dealer. filter from the container opening, as this ● Hydrogen is released and a highly explo- could contaminate the fluid hoses and lead to Always be aware of the danger of injury and sive mixture of gases is generated when the a windscreen washer malfunction. scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire battery is under charge. Sparks when discon- when working on the battery and the electri- necting or releasing cable terminals with the Safety cal system. Therefore, always observe the ignition switched on could also cause an ex- warnings and follow all general safety pre- plosion. » cautions.

211 Advice

● A short circuit is produced if the battery ter- its negative terminal (-) first. Only then may Control lamp minals are bridged, e.g. using metal objects, the positive terminal (+) be disconnected. If the  control lamp is illuminated while the cables, etc. Possible consequences of a short ● When connecting the battery, first connect circuit: melting of lead plates, battery explo- the positive terminal (+) and then the nega- engine is running, the battery is not charg- sion and fire, splashing acid. tive terminal (-). The battery cables must nev- ing. ● The following is forbidden while working on er be connected to the wrong battery termi- Go to a technical service. Have the car's elec- the battery: fire and open flames, smoking nals. Risk of burning the electrical installa- trical equipment inspected. and activities that could produce sparks. tion! Avoid causing sparks when handling cables ● Make sure the battery acid does not come CAUTION or electrical apparatus. Risk of injury in the into contact with the bodywork. Risk of paint-  event of large sparks. work damage. Additionally, if the warning lamp lights up  ● Before working on the electrical system, while driving, the warning lamp also lights ● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight up (cooling system fault). Stop the vehicle you must switch off the engine, the ignition to protect it from ultraviolet radiation. and all electrical components and disconnect and switch off the engine – Risk of engine ● the cable from the negative terminal (-) of the If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks, damage! battery. To change a bulb, simply switch off the battery could run flat. This is because the corresponding light. some components use electricity even in standby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent the ● Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat- battery from running flat by disconnecting its Lifting the battery cover tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Re- negative terminal or leave it charging at a low place a frozen battery. current. ● Never use the jump leads on batteries in ● If you frequently use the vehicle for short which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of trips, the battery may not fully charge and explosion and acid burns! could run flat. ● Never use a damaged battery. Risk of explosion! Replace a damaged battery immedi- For the sake of the environment ately. A flat battery is particularly harmful waste for the environment. It must therefore be dis- CAUTION posed of according to current local law. ● Never disconnect the battery when the igni- Fig. 211 Battery: Opening the cover. tion is switched on, as the electrical system Note (electronic components) of the vehicle could The battery is located beneath a plastic cover be damaged. When disconnecting the battery Replace a battery once it is older than 5 in the engine compartment. from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect years.

212 Checking and refilling levels

– Open the battery cover in the direction indi- Air bubbles can influence the colour of the in- Charging the battery cated by the arrow ››› Fig. 211. dicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indicator before checking the acid level. A fully-charged battery is essential for relia- – The positive terminal (+) of the battery is ble starting. connected in reverse order. ● Black – the acid level is correct. ● Colourless or light yellow – acid level too – Switch off the ignition and all electrical low, battery must be changed. equipment. data Technical Checking the battery electrolyte level – For “fast-charging” only: disconnect both Note battery connection cables (first the “nega- ● The battery acid level is also regularly tive” terminal and then the “positive”). checked during servicing at authorised SEAT Advice dealers. – Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals (red = “positive”, black = “nega- ● The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteries tive”). cannot be checked for technical reasons. ● Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop” – Plug in the battery charger and switch on. system include a battery control unit to con- – After charging the battery: Switch off the trol the battery level for repeated engine battery charger and disconnect the cable. starting. Operation – Remove the charger cables. Fig. 212 Battery: Electrolyte level indicator. – If necessary, reconnect both battery cables We recommend you have the acid level regu- Winter service to the battery (first the “positive” cable, larly checked at an official technical service, then the “negative” cable). particularly in the following cases. At low temperatures the battery provides only a fraction of the starting power it has at nor- When charging with a low current (e.g. with a ● At high outside temperatures. mal temperatures. small battery charger), the battery does not Emergencies ● On long daily trips. normally have to be disconnected. The in- A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures structions of the battery charger manufactur- ● Whenever the vehicle is loaded slightly below to 0°C (32°F). ››› page 213, Charging the battery. er must be followed. We therefore recommend you have the bat- Use a current equivalent to or lower than In vehicles equipped with a battery with col- tery checked and, if necessary, charged at an 10% of the battery capacity to fully charge Safety our indicator, the so-called magic eye official SEAT technical service before the start the battery. ››› Fig. 212 changes colour to indicate the of winter. acid level. Before “fast-charging” the battery however, both battery cables must be disconnected. » 213 Advice

“Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous and Replacing the battery gine is switched off, the key is turned in the requires a battery charger and special knowl- ignition for a long period or the side lights or edge. Fast charges should be performed by A replacement battery must have the same parking lights are switched on. The switching an official technical service. capacity, voltage, current rating and size as off of certain electrical components does not the original. The appropriate types of battery impair driving comfort and often the driver The battery caps should not be opened while can be acquired from authorised SEAT deal- will not even notice. the battery is being charged. ers. CAUTION We recommend having the battery changed In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” sys- by an authorised SEAT dealer, where the new tem, the charger cable cannot be directly con- battery will be correctly installed and the nected to the negative terminal of the vehicle original disposed of in line with regulations. battery but must be attached to the engine ground point ›››  page 52. Automatic disconnection of electrical equipment Disconnecting and connecting the battery When heavily-charging a battery, the programme selected by the electrical system The following functions will either be inoper- control unit prevents the battery from auto- ative or will not work properly after discon- matically discharging. This may result in the necting and reconnecting the battery: following: ● Increase in idling speed so that the alterna- Function Installation tor can supply more current to the electrical Setting the clock ››› page 95 system. ● The performance of certain electrical com- The multifunction display data ››› page 97 is deleted ponents could be limited or some may switch off temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, the heated rear window, the 12 V power socket. Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by Note an authorised SEAT dealer to guarantee the correct working order of all electrical sys- Despite any measures taken by the control tems. unit, the battery could drain. e.g. with the en- 214 Wheels and tyres

Wheels and tyres ● Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip at For the sake of the environment high speeds on damp surfaces. This could Under-inflated tyres increases fuel consump- lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehicle tion. Wheels movement –“skidding” on damp surfaces). ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- Introduction placed immediately. Note data Technical ● Do not use summer or winter tyres that are ● We recommend having all work on tyres WARNING more than 6 or 4 years old respectively. and wheels carried out by an authorised SEAT dealer. ● During the first 500 km, new tyres do not ● Wheel bolts should be clean and screw give maximum grip, therefore you should easily. However, they must never be treated ● We recommend using wheels, tyres, hub drive carefully. Risk of accident! with grease or oil. caps and snow chains from the SEAT Original Advice Accessories programme. ● Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of ac- ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts cident! is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- ● Only use wheels and tyres that been au- cle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tighten- thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model. Fail- ing torque of the wheel bolts is too high, the ure to do so could impair road safety. Risk of bolts and threads could be damaged, leading accident! to the permanent deforming of the rim sup-

port surfaces. Operation ● Never exceed the maximum speed permitted for your tyres. Risk of accident due to tyre ● Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could lead damage and loss of vehicle control! to a wheel coming loose while the vehicle is moving. Risk of accident! ● Under-inflated tyres are submitted to greater rolling resistance. This means that they ● Observe the national legal requirements re- can overheat at high speeds. This can cause garding the use of snow tyres and chains. tread separation and even tyre blow-out. Emergencies ● For driving safety, tyres should be replaced CAUTION at least in pairs according to the axle and not ● Where a spare wheel that is not compatible individually. The tyres with the deepest tread with the wheels fitted is used, follow the in- should always be used on the front wheels. structions ››› page 218. ● Never fit used tyres of an unknown age or ● The prescribed tightening torque for wheel Safety prior use. bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. ● Tyres must be immediately changed at the ● Protect your tyres from coming into contact very latest when they have worn down to the with oil, grease and fuel. tread wear indicators. ● Replace any lost valve caps immediately. 215 Advice

Useful life of tyres Tread wear indicator driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- The base of the side of the original tyres on sumption may increase slightly. your vehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators ››› Fig. 213. The position of these in- Driving style dicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by the Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other braking all increase tyre wear. symbols. Wheel balancing The useful life of the tyres depends primarily The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. on the following factors: Various factors encountered when driving can cause them to become unbalanced, Tyre pressure values which results in vibration of the steering Fig. 213 Side view of tyres with tread wear in- Under-inflation or over-inflation will consider- wheel. dicators. ably reduce the useful life of the tyres and The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre is impair the vehicle's handling. Therefore, fitted or if a tyre is repaired. check the tyre pressure, including the spare wheel, at least once a month and before any Incorrect wheel alignment long journey. Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment cau- Inflation pressures for are lis- summer tyres ses excessive tyre wear, frequently on one ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap side, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyre . The pressures for are ››› Fig. 214 winter tyres wear is very irregular, contact an Official 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) above the summer Service. values. Always check the pressure when the tyre is Tyre damage cold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warm To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, only tyres. The tyre pressures must be altered to drive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowly suit notable changes in the load being car- and at a right angle if possible. ried. Check tyres and wheels regularly for damage Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can (punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities, be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded Fig. 214 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When in outside of the treads.

216 Wheels and tyres

Unusual vibration or the car pulling to one Storing tyres 195 Tyre width in mm side may indicate that one of the tyres is When you remove the tyres, mark them in or- 55 Height/width ratio in % damaged. Reduce speed immediately and der to maintain the same direction of rotation stop if you suspect that a wheel may have when they are installed again. R identifying tyre construction letter – been damaged! Check the tyres for damage Radial

(blisters, cracks, etc.). If no external damage When removed, the wheels and/or tyres data Technical is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably 15 Rim diameter in inches dark location. Store tyres in a vertical posi- nearest Official Service and have the vehicle 85 Load rating code inspected. tion, if they are not fitted on wheel rims. H Speed rating code letter Advice Changing wheels New tyres or wheels The tyres are subject to the following maximum speed limits: All four wheels must be fitted only with tyres of the same type, size and the same tread Speed rating code Maximum speed limit pattern. letter The correct tyre/wheel combinations speci- Q 160 km/h (99 mph) fied for your vehicle are listed in its docu- Operation R 170 km/h (106 mph) mentation. Understanding the tyre designations makes S 180 km/h (112 mph) it easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyre T 190 km/h (118 mph) designation is marked on the sidewall. For U 200 km/h (124 mph) Fig. 215 Interchanging tyres. example.

195/55 R 15 85 H H 210 km/h (130 mph) Emergencies Changing wheels around This contains the following information: V 240 km/h (149 mph) If the wear is visibly greater on the front tyres, they should be exchanged for the rear tyres W 270 km/h (168 mph) as shown in the diagram ››› Fig. 215. All the The manufacturing date is also indicated on tyres will then last for about the same time. Safety the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres side of the wheel). and maintain their optimum useful life, they should be changed around every 10 000 km. DOT … 27 12… »

217 Advice

means, for example, that the tyre was pro- Spare wheel breakdown and drive with the corresponding duced in the 27th week of 2012. care ››› . Follow the instructions ››› page 218 if you Spare wheel location* It must be replaced as soon as possible for a only have a temporary spare wheel. wheel with a normal size and finish.

Note Temporary spare wheel A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted to If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary find out whether wheels or tyres of different spare wheel, there will be a warning sign on sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be the rim of the wheel. fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and Follow the instructions below when driving the rear axle (axle 2). with this wheel fitted. ● After fitting the wheel, the warning sign must not be covered. Fig. 216 Luggage compartment: spare wheel. Tyres with directional tread pattern ● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with the spare wheel and take great care The spare wheel is housed in a well under while driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard The direction of rotation is indicated by the the floor panel in the luggage compartment braking and fast cornering. arrows on the tyre sidewall. The direction of and is secured by a special bolt ››› Fig. 216. rotation indicated must be respected. This ● The tyre pressure is the same as that of the guarantees optimum grip and helps avoid ex- Take out the tool box before removing the standard tyres. cessive noise, wear and aquaplaning. spare wheel. ● Only use this spare wheel to reach the In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel with The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be nearest Official Service, as it is not designed an undetermined tread pattern or an oppo- checked (preferably whenever the tyre pres- for permanent use. site tread pattern must be used and you must sure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap drive carefully, as in these cases the tyres no ››› page 216) to ensure the spare wheel re- WARNING mains ready for use. longer offer maximum performance. ● Under no circumstances must damaged If the spare wheel is not the same size or de- spare wheels be used. sign as the tyres that are mounted on the car ● If the spare wheel is different in size or de- (for example if the car has winter tyres or sign to the tyres currently fitted, never drive tyres with direction tread), only use the spare faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy tyre for a short period of time in the event of acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

218 Wheels and tyres

CAUTION ● One wheel on the axle has been changed ● Under certain conditions (e.g. sporty driving style, driving on loose surfaces or in win- Follow the instructions given on the tempora- Basic system settings ter) the warning lamp  may take a while to ry spare wheel label. Should the tyre pressure change or if one or light up or may remain switched off. more wheels are changed or the position of ● Despite the tyre pressure monitoring sys-

Note data Technical the wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g. tem, the driver remains responsible for main- The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must al- changing round the front and rear wheels, or taining the correct tyre pressure. You must ways correspond to the highest pressure pre- where a warning lamp lights up when driv- therefore check the tyre pressure often. scribed for the model of vehicle in question. ing, the system must be adjusted as follows: ● Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures Note Advice ››› page 216. ● The tyre pressure monitoring system is not Tyre monitoring systems ● Switch the ignition on. a replacement for regularly checking the tyre pressure, as it is unable to recognise an even ● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy drop in pressure. Tyre pressure* Connect system with the button  and the ● The tyre pressure monitoring system is un- function button Setup ›››  page 21. The tyre pressure monitoring system uses able to warn of a sudden drop in tyre pressure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to stop ABS sensors to compare the revolutions and The warning lamp  lights up Operation the circumference of each wheel. Should the the vehicle carefully with no severe braking or steering manoeuvres. circumference of any wheel change, the If the pressure on at least one tyre is signifi- warning lamp  on the general instrument cantly lower than the pressure set by the driv- ● To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring sys- panel will light up and an audible warning er, the warning lamp  will light up ››› . tem works correctly, the basic setting must will be heard. be performed every 10 000 km (6000 miles) The warning lamp  flashes or once a year. Tyre circumference may change if: ● If the battery is disconnected the warning If the warning lamp flashes, there is a fault in  Emergencies ● Tyre pressure is too low lamp lights up when the ignition is switch- the system. Contact a specialised service to ed on. This warning lamp must switch off af- ● Tyre structure is damaged have it fixed. ter covering a short distance. ● Vehicle load not evenly distributed WARNING ● wheels on one axle are subjected to greater

●  Safety load, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, down- If the warning lamp lights up, slow down hill); immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop and check the ● Snow chains are fitted tyres and their pressure as soon as possible. ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted 219 Advice

Winter service

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will significantly improve handling of the vehicle in winter road conditions. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip at temperatures below +7°C (45°F), on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or high speed tyres (code letters H or V on the sidewall). In order to preserve the performance of the vehicle as much as possible, winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels, the minimum depth of the tread must be 4 mm and the maximum age must be 4 years. You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rating if the maximum speed limit of these tyres will not be exceeded, even if the maximum speed limit for the vehicle is higher.

For the sake of the environment Summer tyres should be fitted again in time, as they give better handling on roads free of snow and ice and at temperatures over +7°C (45°F). Summer tyres have a shorter braking distance, produce less rolling noise and do not wear as quickly. They also reduce fuel consumption.

220 Technical specifications Technical data Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- Vehicle identification data on the data cations section label Technical specifications kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS Important information used to denote engine power. data Technical rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

The information in the vehicle documentation Cetane number, indication of the diesel CZ Advice always takes precedence over the informa- combustion power. tion in this Instruction Manual. Research octane number, indication of RON All technical specifications provided in this the knock resistance of petrol. documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- Fig. 217 Data sticker. ded in the Maintenance Programme or the

vehicle registration documents shows which Vehicle data sticker Operation engine is installed in the vehicle. The vehicle data sticker ››› Fig. 217 is located The figures may be different depending on the boot floor and is also attached to the whether additional equipment is fitted, for Maintenance Programme. different models, for special vehicles and for The following information is provided on the other countries. vehicle data sticker:

1 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Emergencies 2 Vehicle model 3 Identifying letters of the gearbox/number of the original paint finish/Interior equipment number/engine power/engine Safety identifying letter »

221 Technical data

4 Partial description of the vehicle From the difference between the total permit- WARNING 5 Diameter of authorised tyre in inches1) ted weight in running order the approximate carrying capacity can be calculated ››› . The maximum permitted weight values must not be exceeded – Risk of an accident and Type plate The carrying capacity must include: damage to the vehicle! The model plate is located at the bottom of ● occupants, the B pillar, between the front and rear doors, ● Note on the right-hand side. all pieces of equipment and other weights, ● roof loads including the roof rack, ● If you wish to calculate the exact weight of The type plate indicates the following your vehicle please contact a SEAT dealer. ● equipment that is not included in the run- weights: ● Depending on the volume of equipment, ning order weight, driving style, road conditions, weather condi- ● Total permitted weight of the vehicle when ● when using the towing bracket, the draw- tions and the condition of the vehicle, con- loaded bar load (max. 50 kg) sumption values can differ from the theoreti- ● Maximum authorised weight of the vehicle cal values stated here.

with a trailer, when the vehicle operates as a Calculating fuel consumption and CO2 emis- tractor sions according to the ECE regulations and ● Maximum permitted load of the front axle the EU specifications Information on fuel consump- ● Maximum permitted load of the rear axle Calculation of fuel consumption for urban driving begins when cold-starting the engine. tion Weight in running order Then, normal city driving is simulated. Fuel consumption The weight in running order only has one ap- In calculating extra-urban driving fuel con- proximate value. This value corresponds to sumption, braking and acceleration is done Approved consumption values are derived the minimum operative weight of the vehicle in all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle. from measurements performed or supervised without additional equipment that increases Driving speed varies within a range of 0 and by certified EU laboratories, according to the its weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel, 120 km/h (75 mph). legislation in force at the time (for more infor- towing bracket. The consumption value in combined driving mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- The running order weight also includes 75 kg is composed of 37% of the value of urban ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- of the weight of the driver and service fluids, driving and 63% of the value of extra-urban ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and in addition to a fuel tank at 90% capacity. driving. apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

1) Valid only for certain countries. 222 Technical specifications

The values relating to fuel consumption and style to suit road conditions and require- In the interest of road safety, we recommend CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- ments. that you always tow approaching the maxi- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating cle at the time of purchase. or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar missible axle load or the permissible total load is too small. Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend on the equipment/features of each individual weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- If the maximum permissible drawbar load data Technical vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road tics of the vehicle may change, which could cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and conditions, traffic conditions, environmental lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the light-weight single axle trailers or tandem vehicle. conditions, load or number of passengers. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer Note weight is legally required for the drawbar Advice In practice, and considering all the factors Driving with a trailer load. mentioned here, consumption values can dif- WARNING fer from those calculated in the current Euro- Trailer weights pean regulations. ● For safety reasons, you should not drive at Trailer weight speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- higher speeds are permitted. Operation Weights proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ● ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without load or the permissible total weight is excee- the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle optional extras. The figure quoted includes mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. may change, leading to accidents, injuries km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different and damage to the vehicle. Special versions, optional equipment fittings in other countries. All data in the official vehi- Emergencies or retro-fitting accessories will increase the cle documentation takes precedence over weight of the vehicle ››› . these data at all times ››› .

WARNING Drawbar loads

● Please note that the centre of gravity may The maximum permitted drawbar load on the Safety shift when transporting heavy objects; this ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- ceed 50 kg. cident. Always adjust your speed and driving

223 Technical data

Wheels low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds. Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- Tyre pressures ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged. The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for Note cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised We recommend that you ask your Technical pressures of warm tyres ››› . Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size. The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer tyres.

Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too

224 Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel Technical data Technical

66 (90)/4,400-5,400 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Ecomotive Advice

Top speed (km/h) 186 (5) 186 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.3 11.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,616 1,625

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,156 1,165 Operation

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 820 820

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 830 830

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 580 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 900 900 Safety

225 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights manual manual Ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 200 (5) 200 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.5 6.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,636 1,645

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,176 1,185

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840 840

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 830 830

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 590

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100

226 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 191 (5) 191 (6) Advice Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 7.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,625 1,665

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,165 1,205

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 820 860 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 840 840

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 600

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 Emergencies Safety

227 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 92 kW (125 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

92 (125)/5,000-6,000 200/1,400-4,000 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 208 (6) 208 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9 9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,677 1,686

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,217 1,226

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 880 880

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 830 830

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 610

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200

228 Technical specifications

Diesel Engine 1.4 CR 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 66 (90)/3,500 230/1,750-2,500 4/1,422

51 CZ data Technical

Outputs and weights manual manual automatic Ecomotive Ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 185 (5) 185 (5) 185 (7) Advice Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8 8.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.7 11.7 11.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,694 1,694 1,715

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,234 1,234 1,255

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 890 910 Operation

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 840 840 840

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 610 620

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 Emergencies Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 750 1,000 Safety

229 Technical data

Diesel Engine 1.6 CR 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 85 (115)/3,500-4,000 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,598 51 CZ

Outputs and weights Ecomotive

Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 201 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10 10

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,735 1,740

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,272 1,280

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 910 910

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200

230 Technical specifications

Dimensions Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 218 Dimensions Operation TOLEDO

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 876/1,004

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,602

D Length (mm) 4,482

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,463/1,500 Emergencies

G Width (mm) 1,715

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,466

Turning radius (m) 10.2 Safety a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

231

Index

Air conditioning ...... 36, 37 Audible signal ...... 61 Index air vents ...... 143 Audible warning signal faults ...... 143 warning and control lamps ...... 98 A introduction ...... 142 warning and indication lamps ...... 98 ABS operation ...... 145 Automatic air conditioning control lamp ...... 155 Alarm system ...... 112 climatronic ...... 147 see also Anti-lock brake system ...... 154, 155 Alternator Automatic car washes Accessories ...... 134, 192 control lamp ...... 212 see Washing ...... 194 Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- Ambient lighting ...... 123 Automatic gearbox gramme) ...... 28 Anti-freeze ...... 40 backup programme ...... 160 Adjusting Anti-lock brake system ...... 154, 155 driving programmes ...... 160 front head restraints ...... 59 Anti-puncture ...... 45, 76 instructions for use ...... 157 Adjusting the head restraints Anti-puncture kit ...... 45, 76 kick-down ...... 158 front head restraints ...... 128 check after 10 minutes ...... 78 manual release of selector lever ...... 35 Adjustment Anti-slip regulation ...... 156 parking ...... 157 CAR menu ...... 99 Anti-theft alarm ...... 112 selector lever lock ...... 159 front head restraints ...... 128 Anti-theft security system ...... 9 selector lever positions ...... 158 lights ...... 117 Anti-theft system ...... 108 starting ...... 157 rear head restraints ...... 59 Armrest stopping ...... 157 seats ...... 56 front seats ...... 129 tiptronic ...... 157, 159 Aerial ...... 194 rear seats ...... 130 AUX-IN ...... 104 Air-conditioning Ashtrays ...... 134 economic use ...... 143 Aspects to take into account before starting the B Airbag covers ...... 14 vehicle ...... 55 Back seat Airbags ...... 66 ASR folding down and raising the back seat back- description ...... 67 control lamp ...... 156 rest ...... 130 Airbag system ...... 14, 66 see also Traction control system ...... 154, 156 Ball coupling activation ...... 68 Assistance systems disassembly ...... 190 control lamp ...... 68 ABS ...... 155 Battery ...... 106 deactivation of front airbag ...... 68, 71 ASR ...... 156 Before starting the vehicle ...... 55 description ...... 67 cruise speed ...... 174 Belt tightening ...... 65 front airbags ...... 14, 69 EDS ...... 156 Biodiesel ...... 201 functioning ...... 68 front Assist Monitoring system ...... 176 Blown bulbs head-protection airbags ...... 16 parking aid ...... 167, 168 change a bulb ...... 83 side airbags ...... 15 Start-Stop ...... 181 Bonnet ...... 11, 205 tiredness detection ...... 182 opening the bonnet ...... 203 tyre monitoring system ...... 219 Assisted starting ...... 51 233 Index

Boot keyless Access ...... 110 Checking levels hook ...... 139 locking ...... 108 engine compartment ...... 205 retaining elements ...... 139 locking manually ...... 10 Child-proof locking ...... 112 retaining nets ...... 139 opening ...... 108 electric windows ...... 115 Brake assist ...... 154 unlocking ...... 108 Child seat Brake fluid ...... 41 Central locking system ...... 107 categorisation in groups ...... 74 checking ...... 209 Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 201 Child seats ...... 16, 74 Brakes Change a bulb ...... 83 ISOFIX system ...... 17 brake fluid ...... 209 Changing a wheel ...... 46, 75 safety instructions ...... 16, 73 control lamp ...... 153 subsequent work ...... 49 securing with the seat belt ...... 16 handbrake ...... 154 Changing bulbs Top Tether system ...... 17 running in ...... 161 daytime driving light ...... 86 Cigarette lighter ...... 133 Brake servo ...... 154 dipped beam ...... 85 City Emergency braking function ...... 180 Braking double headlight bulbs ...... 84 Cleaning ...... 193 brake assist ...... 154 main beam headlight ...... 85 chromed parts ...... 195 Bulb failure side light ...... 85 headlights ...... 196 control lamp ...... 116 turn signal ...... 86 leatherette ...... 197 Changing bulbs on the number plate ...... 91 natural leather ...... 198 C removing the bulb holder ...... 91 plastic parts ...... 196 Capacities ...... 39 Changing bulbs on the side panel ...... 88 upholstery ...... 197, 198 Car-care products ...... 193 fitting the rear light ...... 89 washing the vehicle ...... 194 Care of vehicle removing the bulb holder ...... 88 wheels ...... 197 door lock cylinder ...... 196 removing the rear light ...... 87 windows ...... 196 leatherette ...... 197 Changing lights on the side panel ...... 87 Cleaning and thawing windows ...... 196 natural leather ...... 198 Changing oil ...... 208 Climatronic ...... 36 seat belts ...... 198 Changing rear lights on the rear lid adjusting the temperature ...... 148 upholstery ...... 197 changing bulbs ...... 90 air recirculation ...... 148 washing by hand ...... 194 fitting the bulb-holder ...... 90 automatic mode ...... 148 Carrier system ...... 141 Changing settings blower selection ...... 148 Catalytic converter ...... 164 CAR menu ...... 21 windscreen defrost ...... 149 malfunction ...... 164 Changing tail lights (on the rear lid ...... 89 Close ...... 104 CCS ...... 31 Changing the bulbs Closing Central locking ...... 104 fog light ...... 86 central locking ...... 108 anti-theft alarm ...... 112 Changing the rear lights on the rear lid vehicle with Keyless Access ...... 110 central locking button ...... 109 removing the bulb holder ...... 89 windows ...... 115 closing ...... 108 Charging the battery ...... 51 Coat hooks ...... 135 individualised settings ...... 107 Coming Home and Leaving Home ...... 121 234 Index

Coming Home and Leaving Home Function . . . . 121 engine oil ...... 205 E Control and warning lamps preheating ...... 149 alternator ...... 212 refuelling ...... 201 E10 brakes ...... 153 Diesel particulate filter see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 200 diesel particulate filter ...... 164 malfunction ...... 164 Easy Connect ...... 21, 99 emission control ...... 165 Digital clock ...... 94 Economical engine oil ...... 206 Dimensions ...... 231 driving ...... 162 instrument panel ...... 34 Direction of rotation EDL lights ...... 116 tyres ...... 49 see Electronic differential lock ...... 154, 156 Controls and displays Display ...... 94, 95 Efficiency programme general instrument panel ...... 93 Disposal additional electrical appliances ...... 28 Controls on the steering wheel seat belt tensioners ...... 66 saving tips ...... 28 operating the audio system ...... 101 Door cylinder ...... 9 Electric windows ...... 11, 115 operating the telephone and audio system . . 102 Door handle ...... 9 Electronic differential lock ...... 154, 156 Cooling system Door lock ...... 9 Electronic immobiliser ...... 9, 150 checking coolant ...... 208 Doors Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 154 engine coolant temperature display ...... 97 child-proof locking ...... 112 Emergencies ...... 75 topping up coolant ...... 208 opening and closing ...... 9 automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 160 Correct position ...... 56 Drink holder bulbs ...... 44 Correct sitting position centre console ...... 132 changing a wheel ...... 46, 75 front passenger ...... 57 rear seat armrest ...... 133 emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 50 rear seat passengers ...... 58 Driver hazard warning lights ...... 121 Cruise control ...... 31, 174 see Correct sitting position ...... 56, 57, 58 jump leads ...... 51 adjusting the stored speed ...... 175 Driver information system puncture ...... 44 setting the speed ...... 175 CD/radio indication ...... 23 replacing a blown fuse ...... 43 temporary deactivation ...... 175 engine oil temperature display ...... 28 Emergency turning off the cruise control system ...... 176 operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . 23 fuses ...... 43 Driving abroad Emergency operation D headlights ...... 122 front passenger door ...... 10 selector lever ...... 35 Damage to the vehicle ...... 166 Driving data ...... 23 Emission control system Dash panel ...... 32 data summary ...... 27 control lamp ...... 165 Data sticker ...... 221 memory ...... 26 Emissions data ...... 221 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 14 Driving through water ...... 166 Engine Deactivation of front airbag ...... 68, 71 Driving with a trailer ...... 184, 223 assisted starting ...... 51 Defrosting rear window ...... 123 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 117 preheating ...... 149 Diesel run-in ...... 161 diesel particulate filter ...... 164 Start-Stop system ...... 181 235 Index

starting ...... 149 Environment on-screen messages ...... 177 starting the engine ...... 152 ecological driving ...... 162 operating ...... 178 switching off the engine ...... 152 environmental compatibility ...... 162 radar sensor ...... 177 Engine and ignition Environmental tip switching off temporarily ...... 179 starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 151 refuelling ...... 199 system limitations ...... 179 Engine compartment ...... 11, 202, 205 Equipment ...... 134, 192 see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 176 battery ...... 211 ESC Front Assist monitoring system brake fluid ...... 209 electronic stability control ...... 154 malfunction ...... 177 coolant ...... 208 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 200 on-screen messages ...... 177 engine oil ...... 207 Exhaust gas purification system operating ...... 178 opening the bonnet ...... 203 catalytic converter ...... 164 Front Assist Monitoring system ...... 176 windscreen washer fluid ...... 210 diesel particulate filter ...... 164 city Emergency braking function ...... 180 Engine coolant ...... 40 Extending radar sensor ...... 177 checking level ...... 208 the luggage compartment ...... 130 Front Assist Monitoring System control lamp ...... 208 Exterior lighting switching off temporarily ...... 179 G12 plus-plus ...... 40 change a bulb ...... 83 system limitations ...... 179 G13 ...... 40 Exterior mirrors Front passenger front airbag specifications ...... 40 adjusting ...... 13 control lamp ...... 71 topping up ...... 209 exterior ...... 126 deactivating ...... 14 Engine data ...... 225 heated ...... 126 deactivation ...... 71 Engine fault Exterior view ...... 5, 6 Front seat control lamp ...... 165 External aerial ...... 193 heating ...... 128 Engine management ...... 164 manual adjustment ...... 11 control lamp ...... 165 F Front seats ...... 127 Engine oil ...... 40, 205 Fastening rings ...... 137 Fuel ...... 39 changing ...... 205, 208 Filling up the tank ...... 199 diesel ...... 201 checking oil level ...... 207 Fire extinguisher ...... 75 fuel level gauge ...... 98 consumption ...... 207 First-aid kit ...... 75 refuelling ...... 199, 200 control lamp ...... 206 Floor mats ...... 60 saving ...... 162 dipstick ...... 207 Fluid Level control ...... 39 Fuel consumption inspection service ...... 205 Fog light bulb ...... 86 switching off using inertia ...... 162 maintenance intervals ...... 205 removing the bulb holder ...... 87 why does fuel consumption increase? ...... 164 Oil properties ...... 40 Front Airbag ...... 14 Fuel tank flap specifications ...... 205 Front airbags ...... 69 opening and closing ...... 39 temperature display ...... 28 Front Assist Full-LED Headlights ...... 83 topping up ...... 207 city Emergency braking function ...... 180 malfunction ...... 177 236 Index

Fuses ...... 80 Head-protection airbags doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 25 identifying blown fuses ...... 43 description ...... 16 driver information system ...... 23 identifying by colours ...... 43 safety instructions ...... 70 driving data ...... 26 in the dash panel ...... 81 Headlight range control ...... 117 ECO ...... 96 in the engine compartment ...... 82 Headlights MKB ...... 96 in the instrument panel ...... 43 change a bulb ...... 83 outside temperature ...... 24 preparation before replacing ...... 43 driving abroad ...... 122 recommended gear ...... 96 replacing ...... 43 headlight washers ...... 126 second speed display ...... 96 Head restraints ...... 12 selector lever position ...... 96, 158 G adjustment ...... 128 service intervals ...... 30 Gauge front head restraints ...... 59 speed warning ...... 96 fuel level ...... 98 rear head restraints ...... 59 Start-Stop ...... 96 Gear-change indicator ...... 25 Headrests ...... 12 time ...... 96 Gearbox lever ...... 34 adjustment ...... 128 warning and information messages ...... 26 Gear change ...... 34 front ...... 59 Infotainment system ...... 21 automatic ...... 35 rear ...... 59 Inspection ...... 205 engaging the gears (manual gearbox) ...... 156 Heated rear window ...... 123 Inspection service ...... 205 manual ...... 34 Heating ...... 144 Instrument panel ...... 94 manual gearbox ...... 156 air recirculation ...... 144 display ...... 94, 95 Gear engaged ...... 34 introduction ...... 142 instruments ...... 94 Gear recommendation ...... 25 rear window ...... 123 odometer ...... 97 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) ...... 159 Heating and fresh air ...... 38 service interval indication ...... 30 General instrument panel HHC ...... 154 warning and control lamps ...... 98 control lamps ...... 32 Hill hold control ...... 154 warning and indication lamps ...... 98 controls and displays ...... 93 Horn ...... 93 Instruments ...... 94 warning lamps ...... 32 How to jump start ...... 51 Interior GRA ...... 174 description ...... 52 lighting ...... 122 see also Cruise control ...... 174 Interior lights ...... 20 I Interior view H Identifying letters on engine ...... 221 left guide ...... 7 right-hand drive ...... 8 Handbrake ...... 152, 154 Ignition ...... 18, 149, 151 ISOFIX ...... 17 Hand brake Ignition lock ...... 18, 149, 151 ISOFIX system ...... 17 control lamp ...... 154 Incorrect sitting position ...... 58 Hazard warning lights ...... 19, 121 Indications on the display ...... 95 HBA ...... 154 assist systems submenu ...... 26 J compass ...... 96 Jack ...... 46, 75 distance travelled ...... 95 mounting points ...... 48 237 Index

Jump leads ...... 51 hazard warning lights ...... 19 Malfunction headlight flasher ...... 119 catalytic converter ...... 164 K headlight range control ...... 117 diesel particulate filter ...... 164 Key-operated switch ...... 68 interior lights ...... 122, 123 front assist ...... 177 Keyless Access lighting of the controls ...... 117 gearbox ...... 160 go ...... 151 lighting of the instruments ...... 117 Manual air conditioning keyless-Entry ...... 110 light switch ...... 116 air recirculation ...... 146 keyless-Exit ...... 110 luggage compartment ...... 123 Manual air conditioning manual ...... 145 Keyless-Go ignition push button needs to be main beam headlights ...... 118 Manual gearbox pressed ...... 110 main beams ...... 19 gear lever ...... 156 starter button ...... 151 parking lights ...... 121 Mirror things to note ...... 111 parking lights on both sides ...... 121 vanity ...... 124 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 110 rear fog light ...... 120 Mobile ...... 193 Keyless Access lock and ignition system: rear interior light ...... 123 Mobile telephones ...... 193 see Keyless Access ...... 110 side lights ...... 117 Model plate ...... 221 Keys switch ...... 18 Multimedia ...... 104 remote control ...... 105 turn signals ...... 118 Multimedia compartment ...... 135 replacing the battery ...... 106 Loading the vehicle ...... 137 unlocking and locking ...... 9 luggage compartment ...... 10 N vehicle keys ...... 105 Locking Net pocket central locking ...... 108 luggage compartment ...... 136 L remote control ...... 104 Number of seats ...... 61 Lever Locking and unlocking main beam headlights ...... 118 in the door cylinder ...... 9 O with Keyless Access ...... 110 turn signals ...... 118 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 200 with the central locking button ...... 109 Lifting the vehicle ...... 48 Odometer ...... 94, 97 Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 10 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 117 reset button ...... 97 Luggage compartment ...... 10 Lights ...... 18, 116 Oil properties ...... 40 automatic lock ...... 113 automatic dipped beam control ...... 119 On-screen messages of the instrument panel category N1 vehicles ...... 139 change a bulb ...... 83 front Assist monitoring system ...... 177 light ...... 123 coming home and Leaving Home ...... 121 Open and close ...... 104 net pocket ...... 136 control and warning lamps ...... 116 Opening ...... 104 rear shelf ...... 140 daytime running lights ...... 118 bonnet ...... 203 unlocking manually ...... 10 dipped beam ...... 117 tank flap ...... 199 front fog lights ...... 120 vehicle, with Keyless Access ...... 110 front fog lights with cornering function . . . . . 120 M windows ...... 115 glove box ...... 123 Maintenance intervals ...... 205 238 Index

Opening and closing ...... 9 Particulate filter Rear fog light bonnet ...... 203 control lamp ...... 164 control lamp ...... 116 central locking ...... 108 Particulate filter (diesel) ...... 164 Rear lid ...... 10, 114 in the door cylinder ...... 9 Parts ...... 192 see also Luggage compartment ...... 113 rear lid of the luggage compartment ...... 10 Passenger Rear lights tank flap ...... 199 see Correct sitting position ...... 56, 57, 58 change a bulb ...... 83 windows ...... 115 Pedals ...... 60 Rear seat passengers with the central locking button ...... 109 Petrol see Correct sitting position ...... 56, 57, 58 Opening manually additives ...... 200 Rear View Camera ...... 171 rear lid ...... 10 preheating ...... 149 Rear view mirror Outside temperature ...... 24 refuelling ...... 200 anti-dazzle ...... 126 Physical principles of a frontal collision ...... 63 Rear view mirrors P Plastic parts: cleaning ...... 196 adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 126 Paint Polishing ...... 195 Rear window wiper blade care ...... 195 Positioning seat belts changing ...... 54 damage ...... 196 during pregnancy ...... 64 cleaning ...... 54 Paintwork seat belts ...... 64 Refuelling ...... 199 code ...... 221 Power ...... 134 opening tank flap ...... 199 Parking aid ...... 167 Power socket ...... 134 Remote control ...... 104 parking system plus ...... 168 Power steering ...... 150 synchronisation ...... 105 surroundings warning ...... 168 control lamp ...... 150 Repair work ...... 192 Parking Aid Pre-heating system Replacement adjusting the display and audible warnings . 171 control lamp ...... 165 parts ...... 192 automatic activation ...... 169 Preheating ...... 149 Replacement parts ...... 192 fault ...... 171 Puncture Replacing the battery operation ...... 169 action ...... 44 of the vehicle key ...... 106 rear parking aid ...... 168 Reset the trip recorder ...... 97 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 195 R Rev counter ...... 94, 95 towing bracket ...... 171 Radar sensor ...... 177 Reverse (automatic gearbox) ...... 158 visual indication ...... 170 Radiator fan ...... 205 Rims Parking aid system Raising the vehicle ...... 48 changing a wheel ...... 46 see Parking aid ...... 167, 168 Rear Assist ...... 171 Roll-back function Parking distance warning system instructions for use ...... 172 windows ...... 115 see Parking aid ...... 167, 168 parking ...... 173 Roof carrier ...... 141 ParkPilot screen ...... 172 roof load ...... 142 see Parking aid ...... 167, 168 special characteristics ...... 173 Roof rack ...... 141 Rear Assist system ...... 171 attachment points ...... 141 239 Index

Rubber seals safety notes ...... 62 Storage compartment ...... 131 care ...... 196 unfastened ...... 63 front seats ...... 132 Run-in Seat belt tensioners ...... 13, 65 glasses ...... 135 new engine ...... 161 Seat heating ...... 128 in front door ...... 136 new tyres ...... 215 Selector lever in the centre console ...... 136 the first 1,500 km ...... 161 positions ...... 158 in the luggage compartment ...... 136 Running in Selector lever lock ...... 159 passenger side ...... 131 brake pads ...... 161 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) reflective vest ...... 132 the tyres ...... 161 malfunction ...... 159 Storage compartments ...... 131 manual release ...... 35 Sun visors ...... 124 S Service interval indication ...... 30 Switch Safe ...... 108 Service notification: read ...... 31 hazard warning lights ...... 121 driving safe ...... 55 Side airbags Switching off the engine Safety description ...... 15 with the key ...... 152 child safety ...... 72 safety instructions ...... 69 Switching off the lights ...... 116 child seats ...... 72 see also Airbag system ...... 15 Switching on the lights ...... 116 deactivating the front passenger airbag ...... 14 Signal lever ...... 19 Switching the ignition on and off ...... 149 Safe driving ...... 55 Sitting position System Easy Connect ...... 99 Safety equipment ...... 55 driver ...... 56 Safety instructions Snow chains ...... 49, 224 T head-protection airbags ...... 70 Spanner symbol ...... 30 Tailgate locking time extension side airbags ...... 69 Spare wheel ...... 218 see Luggage compartment ...... 113 using child seats ...... 16, 73 Speed warning device ...... 29 Technical specifications ...... 221 Safety notes Start-Stop Temperature display seat belt tensioners ...... 66 operating ...... 181 engine oil ...... 28 using seat belts ...... 62 Start-Stop System ...... 181 outside temperature ...... 24 Saving tips (efficiency programme) ...... 28 Starter button ...... 151 Temperature selection Seat belt position Starting the engine ...... 149, 152 heating ...... 144 for pregnant women ...... 12, 64 Starting the vehicle ...... 18 Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 224 seat belts ...... 12, 64 Steering Timer ...... 28 Seat belt release ...... 64 steering lock ...... 149 lap times ...... 28 Seat belts ...... 61 Steering wheel menu ...... 28 adjustment ...... 12, 64 adjustment ...... 13 statistics ...... 28 cleaning ...... 198 setting ...... 57 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 157, 159 control lamp ...... 61 Steering wheel controls ...... 100 Tiredness detection ...... 182 height adjustment ...... 65 Storage Top speed ...... 29 protective function ...... 61 luggage compartment ...... 138 Top Tether ...... 17 240 Index

Top Tether system ...... 17 Tyre repair ...... 76 connecting and disconnecting ...... 211 Tow-starting ...... 51 Tyre repair kit disconnect and connect ...... 31 Tow-starting the engine ...... 78 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 76 lifting the cover ...... 212 Tow-starting the vehicle ...... 78 Tyres ...... 215 replacing ...... 214 Towing bracket device ...... 184 changing ...... 46 winter conditions ...... 211 Towing the vehicle ...... 50 dimensions ...... 217 winter service ...... 213 Towline anchorages ...... 50 new tyres ...... 217 Vehicle care front ...... 79 useful life ...... 216 car wash ...... 194 Traction control ...... 156 wear indicators ...... 216 cleaning of chromed parts ...... 195 Traction control system ...... 154 with compulsory direction of rotation ...... 49 headlights ...... 196 Trailer ...... 184 with directional tread pattern ...... 218 heated seats ...... 198 ball coupling ...... 188 Tyre tread depth ...... 216 high-pressure cleaners ...... 194 correct placement ...... 189 Tyre wear ...... 216 paint polishing ...... 195 driving with a trailer ...... 185 rubber seals ...... 196 parking Aid ...... 171 U stickers ...... 195 service position ...... 187 Unfasten the seat belt ...... 12 waxing ...... 195 towing bracket device ...... 186 Unlocking wheel cleaning ...... 197 trailer weights ...... 184 central locking ...... 108 windscreen wipers service position ...... 53 use and maintenance ...... 191 remote control ...... 104 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system Trailer weights ...... 223 Unlocking and locking ...... 9 activation ...... 113 Transporting children ...... 72 with Keyless Access ...... 110 Vehicle seats ...... 61 Transporting items with the central locking button ...... 109 Vehicle tool kit ...... 46, 75 carrier system ...... 141 USB/AUX-IN input ...... 104 Vehicle underbody roof carrier ...... 141 protection ...... 197 Trip recorder ...... 94 V Vehicle washing ...... 194 Tyre mobility set ...... 45 Ventilation slits ...... 137 Vehicle components ...... 77 chassis number ...... 221 sealing a tyre ...... 77 data label ...... 221 W Tyre Mobility Set identification data ...... 221 Warning and control lamps ...... 32, 98 inflating a tyre ...... 77 identification number ...... 221 ABS ...... 155 Tyre Mobility System raising ...... 48 airbags ...... 68 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 76 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 110 ASR ...... 156 Tyre monitoring system ...... 219 Vehicle battery ...... 41, 211 audible warning signal ...... 98 Tyre pressure monitoring assisted starting ...... 51 coolant temperature ...... 208 control lamp ...... 219 automatic disconnection of electrical equip- engine management ...... 165 Tyre pressures ...... 224 ment ...... 214 engine pre-heating/fault system ...... 165 Tyre Profile ...... 216 checking electrolyte level ...... 213 hand brake ...... 154 241 Index

instrument panel ...... 32 Wheels ...... 215, 224 snow chains ...... 49 instrument panel display ...... 33 anti-theft bolts ...... 47 tyres ...... 220 power steering ...... 150 chains ...... 224 Winters conditions pressing the brake ...... 177 changing ...... 46, 49, 75 thawing windows ...... 196 seat belt ...... 61 cleaning ...... 197 Winter service tyre pressure ...... 219 new wheels ...... 217 battery ...... 213 Warning and control lights snow chains ...... 49 disconnecting and connecting ...... 214 ESC ...... 154 spare wheel ...... 218 Winter tyres ...... 220 Warning and indication lamps ...... 98 wheel bolts ...... 76 Wipe interval ...... 125 audible warning signal ...... 98 wheel cover ...... 46 break recommendation ...... 183 Wheel trim coolant temperature ...... 97 removing ...... 47 deactivation of the airbag ...... 14 Windows diesel particulate filter ...... 164 electric ...... 11, 115 disabling airbag ...... 71 removing ice ...... 196 fuel level ...... 98 Window wiper blade ...... 20 gearbox malfunctions ...... 160 Windscreen washer ...... 41 Start-Stop ...... 181 headlight washers ...... 126 Warning symbols Windscreen washer fluid see Warning and control lamps ...... 98 checking ...... 210 Warning triangle ...... 75 winter ...... 210 Washing Windscreen washers ...... 124 by hand ...... 194 Windscreen washer water care of the vehicle exterior ...... 194 checking ...... 210 car wash ...... 194 topping up ...... 210 stickers ...... 195 Windscreen wiper with high-pressure cleaners ...... 194 jets ...... 125 Washing the vehicle Windscreen wipers ...... 20, 124 things to note ...... 111 control ...... 125 Weights ...... 223 lifting the wiper blades ...... 53 Wheel replacing the wiper blades ...... 53 changing ...... 217 service position ...... 53 Wheel bolts ...... 224 windscreen washer fluid ...... 210 caps ...... 47 Winter conditions loosening and tightening ...... 47 battery ...... 211 Wheel cover ...... 46 diesel ...... 201

242

About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow- TOLEDO, some of the equipment and func- ing page. tions that are described in this manual are not This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips WARNING The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error CAUTION or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 OWNER’S MANUAL Toledo 6JA012720BG Inglés (11.16)

6JA012720BG (11.16) SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Toledo